iPECS-MG

Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Revision History
ISSUE 1.0 1.5A DATE 2009. 12 2010. 06 Initial Release Update for iPECS-MG S/W V1.5 Table 1.5.2.4.1-1 Feature Numbering Codes updated Section 1.5.2.4.4 ACD Group Number added PGM 120 Gain Table Index added PGM 161 Gain Table Index added PGM 165 ISDN Progress indicator option added PGM 180 ARS service option added Section 1.5.6.10 ACD Group Assignment added Section 1.5.6.11 ACD Group Attributes added Section 1.5.6.12 ACD Group Announcement added Table 1.5.10.1-1 ISDN Board Attribute updated Section 1.5.10.4 Reset Board added Update for iPECS-MG S/W V1.5 (General edits for errata) Section 1.4 Web Admin & Maintenance Overview updated Table 1.5.1.7-1 System IP Address Plan updated Section 1.5.6.13 ACD Agent State & Priority added Section 1.5.7.3 System Password updated Section 1.5.7.10 System Date, Time updated Section 1.5.7.19 Web Access Authorization updated Section 1.5.16.1 Zone Attributes updated Section 1.5.16.4 Station Zone Attribute updated Table 1.5.18.1-1 DECT Registration updated Section 1.7.2 SMDR updated Section 1.8.10 ACD Group Management added Section 1.8.11 ACD Group Call Traffic added Update for iPECS-MG S/W V1.7 Section 1.5.4.2 Station Directory Number Attributes Section 1.5.4.7 VMIB Attribute (PGM 145,147) updated Table 1.5.1.1-1 1.5.4.7-1Station VMIB Attributes updated Section 1.5.5.1 Co Line Attribute Table 1.5.5.1-1 Co Line Attribute updated Section 1.5.7.18 VM COS Attribute (PGM 243) added Section 1.5.7.19 System Reroute Table (PGM 244) added Section 1.5.8.9 CCR Table (PGM 260) updated Table 1.5.8.9-1 CCR TABLE ATTRIBUTES updated Section 1.5.8.15 ICLID Exception Table (PGM 267) added Section 1.5.20 Hotel Data Section 1.5.20.1 Hotel General Info Table 1.5.20.1-1 Hotel General Info (PGM500) updated Table 1.5.20.1-2 LCD Language Selection updated Section 1.5.20.2 Hotel Additional Info Table 1.5.20.2-1 Hotel Additional Info (PGM501) updated Section 1.5.20.3 Hotel Station Info Table 1.5.20.3-1 Hotel Station Info (PGM502) updated Section 1.5.20.4 Rate For Room Class Section 1.5.20.5 Call Charge Rate Section 1.5.20.6 MiniBar List Section 1.5.20.7 Tax Rate For Bill Section 1.5.20.8 Fee For Part Time Section 1.5.20.9 Dial One Digit Service Table 1.5.20.9-1 Dial One Digit Service (PGM508) updated Section 1.5.20.10 Check In/Out Section 1.5.20.11 Display Room Change Section 1.5.20.12 Bar Cost Change DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES

1.5B

2010. 09

1.7A

2010. 03

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

ISSUE v 2.0

DATE 2011. 11

DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES Update for iPECS-MG S/W V2.0 Section 1.5.1.2 Slot Assignment PGM Code 101 updated Section 1.5.1.6 DTIM/SLTM Registration PGM Code 107 updated Table 1.5.2.4-1 Feature Numbering Codes updated Table 1.5.3.2-1 Station Port Attributes updated Table 1.5.4.2-1 Station Directory Number Attributes updated Section 1.5.4.3 Station Private CO Group Attributes - PGM Code 136 added Section 1.5.4.6 Preset Call Forward PGM Code 142 updated Table 1.5.4.8-1 Station VMIB Attributes updated Table 1.5.5.1-1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES updated Table 1.5.5.2-1 Incoming Co Line Attributes updated Table 1.5.5.6-1 CO OUTGOING ATTRIBUTE updated Section 1.5.5.14 CO MATM Attribute - PGM Code 182 added Table 1.5.7.1-1 System Timers updated Table 1.5.7.2-1 System Attributes updated Table 1.5.7.9-1 SMDR Attributes updated Table 1.5.7.11-1 Button LED Flash Rate / Color Table updated Table 1.5.7.12-1 PPP Attributes updated Table 1.5.7.14-1 Intercom Busy One-Digit Attributes updated Table 1.5.7.18-1 VM COS Attribute updated Section 1.5.8.1 Toll Exception Tables PGM Code 250 updated Section 1.5.8.19 Virtual CLI Table - PGM Code 750 added Section 1.5.8.20 Virtual Subscriber Table - PGM Code 751 added Table 1.5.9.5-1 Tenant Attributes updated Section 1.5.9.7 Call Restriction PGM Codes 284285 updated Section 1.5.9.8 Local Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 286 updated Section 1.5.9.9 Long Distance Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 287 updated Section 1.5.9.10 International Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 288 updated Section 1.5.9.11 Mobile Call Prefix Tables - PGM Code 289 added Section 1.5.9.12 Tone Tables PGM Code 290 updated

Copyright 2010 LG-Ericsson Co. Ltd. All Rights Reserved This material is copyrighted by LG-Ericsson Co. Ltd. (LG-Ericsson). Any unauthorized reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws. LG-Ericsson reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice. The information furnished by LG-Ericsson in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases. LG-Ericsson and iPECS-MG are trademarks of LG-Ericsson Co. Ltd. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table of Contents
1. Web Service ........................................................................ 1
1.1 General ......................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 PC/Browser .............................................................................................1 1.1.2 Environment for LAN connection ............................................................1 1.1.3 Web Browser setting ...............................................................................1

1.2 Web Home Page .......................................................................... 3

1.2.1 Browser Access ......................................................................................3 1.2.2 User Guide ..............................................................................................4 1.2.3 Station Program ......................................................................................5 1.2.4 Web Admin & Maintenance ....................................................................5

1.3 Web Admin Data Modification & Access .................................. 6

1.3.1 Web Admin Data Modification ................................................................6 1.3.2 Maintenance & Admin ID & Password ....................................................6 1.3.3 Password Encryption ..............................................................................7

1.4 Web Admin & Maintenance Overview ....................................... 8 1.5 iPECS Web Administration ........................................................ 9
1.5.1 Pre-Programmed Data ..........................................................................10
1.5.1.1 Location Program PGM Code 100 ................................................... 11 1.5.1.2 Slot Assignment PGM Code 101 ..................................................... 12 1.5.1.3 Logical Slot Assignment ..................................................................... 13 1.5.1.4 DECT/IP Phone/SIP Phone Max. Port PGM Code 104 ................... 15 1.5.1.5 IP-Phone Registration PGM Code 106 ............................................ 16 1.5.1.6 DTIM/SLTM Registration PGM Code 107 ....................................... 17 1.5.1.7 IP Address Plan PGM Codes 108109 ........................................... 18

1.5.2 Numbering Plan ....................................................................................20

1.5.2.1 Numbering Plan Type PGM Code 110 ............................................ 21 1.5.2.2 System Numbering Plan PGM Code 111 ........................................ 22 1.5.2.3 Flexible Station Numbering Plan PGM Code 112 ............................ 23 1.5.2.4 Flexible Numbering Plan PGM Codes 113 ...................................... 24 1.5.2.5 CO Group Access Code - PGM code 114 .......................................... 29 1.5.2.6 Station Group Number - PGM code 115 ............................................. 30 1.5.2.7 ACD Group Number - PGM code 118 ................................................ 31

1.5.3 Station Port Data ..................................................................................32

1.5.3.1 Station Type PGM Code 120 ........................................................... 33 1.5.3.2 Station Port Attributes PGM Codes 121124 .................................. 34 1.5.3.3 Flexible Button Assignment PGM Code 126 ................................... 39 1.5.3.4 CTI IP Address Assignment ................................................................ 41

1.5.4 Station Number Data ............................................................................42

1.5.4.1 Station DN (Directory Number) Assignment PGM Code 130 .......... 43 1.5.4.2 Station Directory Number Attributes PGM Codes 131135 ............. 45 1.5.4.3 Station Private CO Group Attributes - PGM Code 136 ....................... 50

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.4 Station COS Assignment PGM Code 137 ....................................... 53 1.5.4.5 Station Auto Dial Attribute PGM Code 138 ...................................... 54 1.5.4.6 Preset Call Forward PGM Code 142 ............................................... 55 1.5.4.7 Call Forward PGM Code 143 ........................................................... 56 1.5.4.8 VMIB Attribute PGM Code 145, 147 ................................................ 57 1.5.4.9 Mobile Phone Attribute PGM Code 146 ........................................... 60 1.5.4.10 CO/IP Group Access PGM Code 150 ............................................ 61 1.5.4.11 Internal Page Group Access PGM Code 151 ................................ 62 1.5.4.12 Command Conference Group Access PGM Code 152 ................. 63

1.5.5 CO Line Data ........................................................................................64

1.5.5.1 CO Line Attribute PGM Codes 160163 .......................................... 65 1.5.5.2 Incoming CO Attributes PGM Codes 165166 ................................ 71 1.5.5.3 CO Ring Assignment PGM Code 167 ............................................. 75 1.5.5.4 Incoming CO Normal/DISA Attributes PGM Code 168 .................... 77 1.5.5.5 CO Incoming Alternate Destination PGM Code 169 ........................ 78 1.5.5.6 CO Outgoing Attribute PGM Codes 170171 .................................. 81 1.5.5.7 CO Outgoing Alternate Destination PGM Code 173 ........................ 85 1.5.5.8 CO Outgoing Inter Digit Timer PGM Code 174 ............................... 87 1.5.5.9 CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer PGM Code 175 ............................ 89 1.5.5.10 CO COS Assignment PGM Code 177 ........................................... 90 1.5.5.11 CO to CO Call Attributes PGM Code 179 ...................................... 91 1.5.5.12 CO Group Access Code Attribute PGM Code 180 ........................ 93 1.5.5.13 Alternate Ring Assignment PGM Code 181 .................................. 95 1.5.5.14 CO MATM Attribute - PGM Code 182 .............................................. 96

1.5.6 Station Group Data ...............................................................................98

1.5.6.1 Station Group Assignment PGM Code 200 ..................................... 99 1.5.6.2 Station Group Attributes PGM Codes 201202 ............................. 101 1.5.6.3 Voice Mail Group Attributes PGM Code 203 ................................. 105 1.5.6.4 Pick Up Group PGM Code 204 ...................................................... 107 1.5.6.5 Page Group PGM Code 205 .......................................................... 108 1.5.6.6 Command Conference Group PGM Code 206 .............................. 109 1.5.6.7 PTT Group PGM Code 208 ........................................................... 111 1.5.6.8 Interphone Group PGM Code 209 ................................................. 112 1.5.6.9 Pilot Hunt Group PGM Codes 210211 ......................................... 114 1.5.6.10 ACD Group Assignment PGM Code 212 ..................................... 116 1.5.6.11 ACD Group Attributes PGM Codes 213214 .............................. 118 1.5.6.12 ACD Group Announcement PGM Code 215 ............................... 122 1.5.6.13 ACD Agent State & Priority ............................................................. 123

1.5.7 System Data .......................................................................................125

1.5.7.1 System Timers I to III PGM Codes 220222 ................................. 126 1.5.7.2 System Attributes PGM Code 223 ................................................. 129 1.5.7.3 System Authorization Code PGM Code 225 ................................. 132 1.5.7.4 System Password PGM Code 226 ................................................ 133 1.5.7.5 Alarm Attributes PGM Code 227 ................................................... 136 1.5.7.6 External Control Contacts PGM Code 228 .................................... 137 1.5.7.7 Music Sources PGM Code 229 ..................................................... 138 1.5.7.8 RS-232 Port Settings PGM Code 230 ........................................... 140 1.5.7.9 Serial Port Function Selections PGM Code 231 ............................ 141 1.5.7.10 SMDR Attributes PGM Code 232, 238 ........................................ 143 1.5.7.11 System Date, Time PGM Code 233 ............................................ 148 1.5.7.12 Button LED Flash Rate PGM Code 234 ...................................... 150

ii

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.13 PPP Attributes PGM Code 235 .................................................... 154 1.5.7.14 Mobile Attributes PGM Code 236 ................................................ 156 1.5.7.15 Intercom Busy One-Digit Attributes PGM Code 237 .................... 157 1.5.7.16 Dummy Dial-Tone Table PGM Code 240 .................................... 159 1.5.7.17 Executive/Secretary Assign PGM Code 241 ............................... 160 1.5.7.18 Executive-Executive Access PGM Code 242 .............................. 162 1.5.7.19 VM COS Attribute PGM Code 243 .............................................. 162 1.5.7.20 System Reroute Table PGM Code 244 ....................................... 164 1.5.7.21 PPTP Attribute ................................................................................ 167 1.5.7.22 Web Access Authorization .............................................................. 169

1.5.8 Table Data ..........................................................................................170

1.5.8.1 Toll Exception Tables PGM Code 250 ........................................... 171 1.5.8.2 Digit Conversion Tables PGM Codes 251252 ............................. 172 1.5.8.3 System Time Tables PGM Codes 253254 .................................. 173 1.5.8.4 LCR Time Table PGM Code 255 ................................................... 175 1.5.8.5 Holiday Time Table PGM Code 256 .............................................. 176 1.5.8.6 System Speed Table PGM Code 257 ............................................ 177 1.5.8.7 Emergency Code Table PGM Code 258 ....................................... 178 1.5.8.8 VMIB Announcement Table PGM Code 259 ................................. 179 1.5.8.9 Customer Call Routing Table PGM Code 260 ............................... 180 1.5.8.10 Authorization Code Table ............................................................... 181 1.5.8.11 ICLID Route Table PGM Code 262 ............................................. 182 1.5.8.12 CLI Conversion Table PGM Code 263 ........................................ 183 1.5.8.13 Tone Frequency/Cadence Table PGM Code 264 ....................... 184 1.5.8.14 Ring Table PGM Code 265 .......................................................... 186 1.5.8.15 Ring Frequency/Cadence Table PGM Code 266 ........................ 188 1.5.8.16 ICLID Exception Table PGM Code 267 ....................................... 190 1.5.8.17 R2 Signal Group Table PGM Code 268 ...................................... 191 1.5.8.18 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM Code 269 .................................... 192 1.5.8.19 Virtual CLI Table - PGM Code 750 ................................................. 193 1.5.8.20 Virtual Subscriber Table - PGM Code 751 ..................................... 194

1.5.9 Tenant Data ........................................................................................198

1.5.9.1 Attendant Group Assignment PGM Code 270 ............................... 199 1.5.9.2 Attendant Group Attributes PGM Codes 271272 ......................... 200 1.5.9.3 Night Attendant Group Assignment PGM Code 275 ..................... 204 1.5.9.4 Night Attendant Group Attributes PGM Codes 276277 ............... 205 1.5.9.5 Tenant Attributes PGM Code 280281 .......................................... 209 1.5.9.6 Tenant Group Access PGM Code 283 .......................................... 213 1.5.9.7 Call Restriction PGM Codes 284285 ........................................... 214 1.5.9.8 Local Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 286 ....................................... 217 1.5.9.9 Long Distance Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 287 ......................... 218 1.5.9.10 International Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 288 .......................... 219 1.5.9.11 Mobile Call Prefix Tables - PGM Code 289 .................................... 220 1.5.9.12 Tone Tables PGM Code 290 ....................................................... 221

1.5.10 Board Data ........................................................................................225

1.5.10.1 ISDN Board Attribute PGM Code 300 ......................................... 226 1.5.10.2 ISDN Board Clock Priority PGM Code 301 .................................. 228 1.5.10.3 VOIB/VMIB Board Attribute PGM Code 305 ................................ 229 1.5.10.4 Reset Board PGM Code 310 ....................................................... 230

1.5.11 Networking Data ...............................................................................231

1.5.11.1 Net Basic Attribute PGM Code 320 ............................................. 232

iii

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.11.2 Net Numbering Plan Table PGM Code 321 ................................. 234

1.5.12 T-Net Data ........................................................................................236

1.5.12.1 T-Net Attribute PGM Code 330 .................................................... 237 1.5.12.2 CM Attribute PGM Code 331 ....................................................... 238 1.5.12.3 FoPSTN Attribute PGM Code 333 ............................................... 239 1.5.12.4 T-Net Board Attribute PGM Code 344 ......................................... 241 1.5.12.5 IP-Phone T-Net Enable PGM Code 335 ...................................... 242

1.5.13 H.323 Data ........................................................................................243

1.5.13.1 H.323 Routing Attributes PGM Code 360 .................................... 244 1.5.13.2 H.323 Call Setup Attribute PGM Code 361 ................................. 245 1.5.13.3 H.323 Incoming Attributes PGM Code 362 .................................. 247 1.5.13.4 GateKeeper Attributes PGM Code 363 ....................................... 248 1.5.13.5 H.323 Check Message Information - PGM Code 364 .................... 249

1.5.14 SIP CO Data .....................................................................................250

1.5.14.1 SIP CO Basic Registration .............................................................. 251 1.5.14.2 SIP CO Additional Registration ....................................................... 252 1.5.14.3 SIP CO Codec ................................................................................ 255 1.5.14.4 SIP CO User ID Table .................................................................... 256

1.5.15 SIP Station Data ...............................................................................257

1.5.15.1 SIP Station Basic Registration ........................................................ 258 1.5.15.2 SIP Station Additional Registration ................................................. 259 1.5.15.3 SIP Station Service ......................................................................... 261

1.5.16 Zone Data .........................................................................................262

1.5.16.1 Zone Attributes PGM Code 395 ................................................... 263 1.5.16.2 Zone RTP Relay Group PGM Code 396 ..................................... 265 1.5.16.3 Inter-Zone Attribute PGM Code 397 ............................................ 266 1.5.16.4 Station Zone Attribute PGM Code 399 ........................................ 267

1.5.17 SNMP Data .......................................................................................268 1.5.18 DECT Data .......................................................................................270

1.5.18.1 DECT Registration .......................................................................... 271 1.5.18.2 DECT Attributes PGM Code 491 ................................................. 276

1.5.19 Green Mode ......................................................................................277

1.5.19.1 Green Mode Activation ................................................................... 278 1.5.19.2 Green Mode Time Setting ............................................................... 279

1.5.20 Hotel Data .........................................................................................280

1.5.20.1 Hotel General Info PGM Code 500 .............................................. 281 1.5.20.2 Hotel Additional Info PGM Code 501 ........................................... 284 1.5.20.3 Hotel Station Attribute PGM Code 502 ........................................ 286 1.5.20.4 Rate For Room Class PGM Code 503 ........................................ 288 1.5.20.5 Call Charge Rate PGM Code 504 ............................................... 289 1.5.20.6 Bar/MiniBar List PGM Code 505 .................................................. 290 1.5.20.7 Tax Rate For Bill PGM Code 506 ................................................ 291 1.5.20.8 Fee For Part Time PGM Code 507 .............................................. 292 1.5.20.9 Dial One digit Service PGM Code 508 ........................................ 293 1.5.20.10 Check In/Out ................................................................................. 295 1.5.20.11 Display Room Charge ................................................................... 300 1.5.20.12 Bar Cost Charge ........................................................................... 301

1.5.21 Initialization .......................................................................................302

1.5.21.1 Initialization PGM Code 499 ........................................................ 303

iv

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6 File Upload & Upgrade ........................................................... 305

1.6.1 File Upload ..........................................................................................306 1.6.2 G/W Upgrade ......................................................................................307 1.6.3 Upgrade Process View .......................................................................309 1.6.4 VMIB Prompt Upgrade ........................................................................310 1.6.5 AAFU System Greeting Up & Download View ....................................311 1.6.6 WTIB Base Upgrade ...........................................................................313 1.6.7 iPECS-MG System Upgrade Process ................................................314
1.6.7.1 iPECS-MG Software Full Upgrade Sequence .................................. 314 1.6.7.2 MPB Upgrade ................................................................................... 316 1.6.7.3 Upgrade HTML Files ......................................................................... 316 1.6.7.4 Appliances Upgrade (Gateway Board and IP Phone) ...................... 316 1.6.7.5 Voice Prompt Upgrade ..................................................................... 317 1.6.7.6 WTIB Base Upgrade ......................................................................... 317

1.7 System Management .............................................................. 318

1.7.1 Database ............................................................................................319
1.7.1.1 Database Download ......................................................................... 320 1.7.1.2 Database Upload .............................................................................. 321

1.7.2 SMDR .................................................................................................322

1.8 Station Program (User Portal) ............................................... 323

1.8.1 Station Port Attributes .........................................................................324 1.8.2 Station DN Attributes ..........................................................................327 1.8.3 Call Forward .......................................................................................329
1.8.3.1 Station Call Forward ......................................................................... 330 1.8.3.2 Preset Call Forward .......................................................................... 331

1.8.4 Pre-selected Message ........................................................................332 1.8.5 Station Speed Dial ..............................................................................333 1.8.6 Flex Buttons ........................................................................................334 1.8.7 Station ICLID ......................................................................................336 1.8.8 Mobile Extension Attribute ..................................................................337 1.8.9 Internal SMS .......................................................................................338 1.8.10 ACD Group Management .................................................................339 1.8.11 ACD Group Call Traffic .....................................................................341 1.8.12 Station Logout ...................................................................................342

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1. WEB SERVICE
1.1 General
iPECS-MG incorporates a Web Server located in the MPB, which is employed by the systems Web Service. Using a Web browser to access the system Web Server and the database managed in a user-friendly environment. In addition to modifying the system database, the iPECS-MG Web Admin provides for system file upload, remote upgrade, and database download. The iPECS-MG default database includes assignment of a private IP address to the system. This address (10.10.10.1) may be used to access the system from the LAN. However, a routable IP address must be assigned for access from a remote location refer to Section 1.2.1. To access the iPECS-MG Web Server requires the following: Operating iPECS-MG system Known IP address assigned in MPB Known TCP port assigned in MPB iPECS-MG connected to an accessible LAN iPECS-MG id & password (Maint, Admin, User), where applicable

1.1.1 PC/Browser
MS Internet Explorer (IE) 5.5 or higher version is recommended. Windows PC, containing at least 32MB RAM free (64MB or more RAM is recommended). Network Interface Card (NIC)

1.1.2 Environment for LAN connection

IEEE 802.3, 10/100 Base T Static/DHCP addressing Firewall, requires Network Administrator to allow access. Remote access requires a routable public/private IP address for the iPECS-MG system Web server (must be assigned to the system prior to access).

1.1.3 Web Browser setting

Web browsers may store (cache) a copy of the iPECS Web pages in cache memory. The Web browser may use these copies to provide a quick view. If the Web page has been altered by data entered in Station Admin or a file upgrade, the cached copy will be out-of-date and could cause unexpected system operation. To assure proper page views and data entry, the browser can be set to eliminate the use of the cached pages:

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1. On your PC, run MS Internet Explorer and click [Tools]. 2. Click [Internet Options].

Figure 1.1.3-1 MS Internet Explore Options General Menu 3. Click [Settings] in Browsing history.

Figure 1.1.3-2 MS Internet Explore Settings Menu 4. Check Every visit to the page and click [OK].

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.2 Web Home Page

1.2.1 Browser Access
During initialization, a default database is established; refer to Section 1.3.1 in the iPECS-MG Administration and Maintenance Manual. While the system will function employing the defaults, there are several data entries, which MUST be completed to assure proper operation of the system. The system employs the Country Code to establish tone and gain plans specific to the country. In addition, the MPB IP address, sub-net mask and Router IP address must be assigned for proper external IP call operation, Remote services, and Remote Admin access. In the browser ADDRESS field, enter the MPB IP address and TCP port. Select GO; the Web server returns the iPECS-MG Web Services Home page. On the Home page, one of three services may be selected, the brief User Guide, Station Program or Admin & Maintenance.

Figure 1.2.1-1 iPECS-MG Home page

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.2.2 User Guide

Selecting the User Guide will display a brief user manual. The user may select a feature from the left frame (as shown); to select a brief description of the feature, which then will be displayed in the right frame.

Figure 1.2.2-1 User Guide

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.2.3 Station Program

If the Station Program item is selected from the Home page, the user receives the Station Program displays starting with the Station Program password Web page, refer to Figure 1.2.3-1. Note that if a password is not assigned for the station, the user will not be able to log in to the Station Program Web page. For detailed descriptions, refer to section Station Program (User Portal).

Figure 1.2.3-1 Station Password

1.2.4 Web Admin & Maintenance

If the Admin & Maintenance item is selected from the Home page, the Admin & Maintenance manual will display. For detailed description refer to section 1.4.

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.3 Web Admin Data Modification & Access

1.3.1 Web Admin Data Modification
Each of the systems data entry Web pages includes a frame for data display and modification. To modify data: 1. Click in the data field; either a drop-down menu will appear for entry selection, or a cursor will appear in the field for the user to type in the data required. 2. When finished, click the [Save] button to send the new page to the system and including the modified data. Some of the Web pages include blue colored text in the table headers. Selecting this text will order the table based on the column selected. In some cases, where mentioned, it may be necessary to reset the system. The system can be reset manually as described in the iPECS-MG Installation and Description Manual or by selecting the [Reset System]button on the Initialization Web page.

1.3.2 Maintenance & Admin ID & Password

The iPECS-MG System supports a multi-level ID & password structure. The Maintenance ID & Password controls the access rights of the Admin and User level id & passwords. It is highly recommended that an ID & password be assigned. In addition, the Web password can be encrypted, refer to Section 1.3.3. 1. From the Home page, click on Admin & Maintenance, the System ID and password Web page will be displayed (refer to Figure 1.3.2-1).

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.3.2-1 System ID & Password

1.3.3 Password Encryption

When enabled, the iPECS-MG can implement decryption of a password employing RC-6 block encryption (PGM 223). iPECS-MG employs a Sun Java Virtual Machine applet to implement AES encryption. The PC entering the Password must have a JAVA Virtual Machine and the JRE (Java Runtime Environment) Explorer option enabled to properly handle encrypted passwords. The Sun JVM is downloaded from the Java home page (www.java.com). Once downloaded, execute the downloaded file. To enable the Explorer JRE option: 1. From the Explorer menu select Internet Options>Advanced. 2. Click the checkbox to activate the Use JRE. Option.

3. After Restarting the computer, access the iPECS-MG Web ID & password page; the Applet iPECSPwd started message will display in the bottom-left corner of the screen to indicate password encryption is active (This message would not display according to Internet Explorer version or PCs model).

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.4 Web Admin & Maintenance Overview

In the Web Admin initial screen (Section 1.3.3), enter the user ID and the password and click on the Login button to access the iPECS-MG Admin & Maintenance Main Page, refer to Figure 1.4-1.

Figure 1.4-1 iPECS Admin & Maintenance Main Page Based on the user ID and the password entered, access to database items and maintenance functions is determined. The Admin & Maintenance Main Page is comprised of three sections: Menu bar Upper frame Web site directory & navigation section Left frame Info and Entry section Central frame Items in the Menu bar are mouse-clickable for selections of: Administration access to system database. S/W Upgrade permits upload of operating files to the iPECS-MG system and board. System Management permits databases to be downloaded, including all data, system speed dial and SMDR.

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5 iPECS Web Administration

To enter the system database, select the iPECS-MG Administration item in the menu bar. The Administration Navigation frame will be displayed on the left (refer to Figure 1.5-1).

Figure 1.5-1 Admin Menu

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.1 Pre-Programmed Data

Selecting a Pre-Programmed Data program group will display the sub-menu shown, Figure 1.5.1-1, and described in the following sections.

Figure 1.5.1-1 Pre-Programmed Data Sub-Menu

10

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.1.1 Location Program PGM Code 100

Selecting Location Program will display the Input Entry page, Figure 1.5.1.1-1.

Figure 1.5.1.1-1 Location Program Under Location Program, the country is identified using international dial codes (Nation Code). A 24-character Site Name may be defined. This information is used to set gain, frequencies and other system characteristics specific to the country and regional regulatory requirements. The Site Name is primarily useful for the installer/programmer as a reference to customer.

11

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.1.2 Slot Assignment PGM Code 101

Selecting Slot Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.1.2-1.

Figure 1.5.1.2-1 Slot Assignment Table 1.5.1.2-1 Slot Assignment Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Slot No. DESCRIPTION The slot no 0: The virtual slot for AAFU or VOIU in MPB 1: DSIU slot on MPB 218: The real slot no 1956: Slot no for iPECS Gateway (DTIM/SLTM/MATM) 88: The virtual slot for SIP Phone 99: The virtual slot for proprietary phone (IP Phone or Phontage) Display logical number of device. Display the board connection status. Display the board type. Select the board type to add new board. Display the port number of board. Display the device status on board. Display the MAC address of gateway. Display the IP Address of board or gateway. Display the version of board or gateway. Display the CPU type of board or gateway. DEFAULT

Logical No. Connection Type No. of Port State MAC Address IP Address Version CPU

12

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.1.3 Logical Slot Assignment

Selecting Logical Slot Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.1.3-1.

Figure 1.5.1.3-1 Logical Slot Assignment of CO Board

Figure 1.5.1.3-2 Logical Slot Assignment of Station Board

13

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.5.1.3-3 Logical Slot Assignment of VMIB Board The CO/Station/VMIB logical order can be changed by adding a new board, deleting a board or re-arranging the slot order. After changing the logical slot assignment, the system should be reset to apply the updated order.

14

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.1.4 DECT/IP Phone/SIP Phone Max. Port PGM Code 104

Selecting DECT/IP/SIP Max Port will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.1.4-1.

Figure 1.5.1.4-1 DECT/IP/SIP Maximum Port Assignment The DECT, Proprietary Phone (IP Phone or Phontage) and SIP Phone number to be registered can be assigned. After making the necessary updates, reset the system to apply the changes. Table 1.5.1.4-1 Maximum Port Assignment Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Maximum Number of DECT Maximum Number of IP Phone Maximum Number of SIP Phone DESCRIPTION MAX No of DECT that can be registered to the System. MAX No of IP Phone that can be registered to the System. MAX No of SIP Phone that can be registered to the System. DEFAULT 8 32 32

15

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.1.5 IP-Phone Registration PGM Code 106

Selecting IP-Phone Registration will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.1.5-1.

Figure 1.5.1.5-1 IP-Phone Registration Table When the desired Index is selected on the screen, the range is shown above (ex., [150], [51 100], [101150]). Table 1.5.1.5-1 Registration Table Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Index MAC Address ID Password Station Number IP Address Firewall IP Address Type RTP Security State Mode Version The index of IP phone MAC Address of IP phone registered ID of Phontage registered Password of Phontage registered Displays the station number if IP phone/Phontage is registered. Displays the IP Address of the IP phone/Phontage. Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP phone/Phontage. Displays the model name of the IP phone/Phontage. Enables or disables RTP Security of the IP phone. Displays the connection status of the IP phone/Phontage. Displays the connection mode of the IP phone/Phontage. Displays the version of the IP phone/Phontage. DESCRIPTION DEFAULT

16

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.1.6 DTIM/SLTM Registration PGM Code 107

Selecting DTIM/SLTM/MATM Registration will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.1.6-1.

Figure 1.5.1.6-1 DTIM/SLTM/MATM Registration Table Table 1.5.1.6-1 Registration Table Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Slot No. MAC Address Logical Number Firewall IP Address RTP Security Type State Mode Version DESCRIPTION Slot number of DTIM/SLTM/MATM. MAC Address of gateway Displays the station number of DTIM/SLTM/MATM. Displays the Firewall IP Address of the gateway. Enables or disables RTP Security of the gateway. Displays the gateway type. Displays the connection status of the gateway. Displays the connection mode of DTIM/SLTM/MATM. Displays the version of the DTIM/SLTM/MATM. DEFAULT

17

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.1.7 IP Address Plan PGM Codes 108109

Selecting IP Address Plan will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.1.7-1.

Figure 1.5.1.7-1 System IP Address Plan The System IP Address Plan sets several IP addresses for external VoIP calls and the router, etc. NOTE The IP and Router addresses must be routable IP addresses for access to an external VoIP network, remote access by an IP Phone and remote Web access. System IP Address cant use 10.1.1.xxx. This IP Address is used for inner board. When used, the VOIB (Voice over IP Board) must also have a routable IP address for access to/from an external VoIP network and a remote device. iPECS-MG can be installed behind a NAPT server, if the NAPT server provides fixed address translation and port forwarding to the system. In this case, the system will employ the Firewall IP address as the fixed IP address for communication with remote devices. This address must be assigned as the MFIM address in the remote device.

18

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.1.7-1 System IP Address Plan

ATTRIBUTE IP Address Subnet Mask Router IP Address IP Address of router for external network (WAN/IP) access. Required for shared voice and data LAN and remote Web access. When the system is installed behind a NAPT server, the fixed IP Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned in this field. Also, use this IP address for the MFIM address in remote devices. IP Address of the first Domain Name Server, which iPECS will use to resolve URLs to an IP address. IP Address of the second Domain Name Server. IP Address of the third Domain Name Server. IP Address of the fourth Domain Name Server. IP Address of the fifth Domain Name Server. TCP Port forH.323 signaling UDP Port for SIP signaling If this field is set to ON, the system obtains the IP-address from the DHCP Server when it is booting. Diff-Serv pretag value Display the MAC Address of MPB. Display UDP Port for communicating between MPB and Boards (or, IP Phone). Private Subnet Mask Display system version. Display the released date of system software. Display system boot version. Display the released date of system boot. Display the version of system OS Display the released date of system OS 5588 1720 5060 Off 4 DESCRIPTION Public IP Address required for remote user and external VoIP network access (IPv4 format). DEFAULT 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.254

Firewall IP Address

0.0.0.0

DNS IP Address Primary DNS Address Secondary DNS Address Third DNS Address Fourth DNS Address H.323 Port (09999) SIP Port (09999) DHCP Usage DiffServ (063) MAC Address IPKTS Protocol Port Private Subnet Mask Application Release Version Application Release Date Boot Version Boot Release Date OS Version OS Release Date

0.0.0.0

19

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.2 Numbering Plan

Selecting the Numbering Plan program group returns the sub-menu displayed, Figure 1.5.2-1.

Figure 1.5.2-1 Numbering Plan sub-menu

20

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.2.1 Numbering Plan Type PGM Code 110

Selecting Numbering Plan Type will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.2.1-1.

Figure 1.5.2.1-1 Numbering Plan Type iPECS-MG system provides default Numbering plan set. One of any numbering plans can be installed or every numbering plan can be cleared. If numbering plan type 7 (Delete All Numbering) is selected, all numbering codes are deleted. After deleting, user should assign the System Numbering Plan (PGM 111) first. After configuring the system numbering plan, user can assign the other numbering plan code. This is useful when user wants to reconfigure all the numbering codes without default values.

21

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.2.2 System Numbering Plan PGM Code 111

Selecting System Numbering Plan will display page shown, Figure 1.5.2.2-1.

Figure 1.5.2.2-1 System Numbering Plan To assign a numbering plan code, its type should be matched with a System Numbering Plan, which consists of a prefix, and more digits. Prefix means the leading digits of the numbering plan code, and more digits means number of following digits of that Prefix code. The maximum length of each numbering plan code is 8, and up to 4 more digits. When a System Numbering Plan covers numbering plan codes of more than 4 digits, the preceding digits of the prefix code placed at more than 4th digits from end digit called Master Prefix Digits; Maximum 3 in MG-100 system and 5 in MG-300 system Master Prefix Digits can exist. NOTE System Numbering Plan conflict is not allowed; if theres Prefix 1 and more digit 4, then there cannot be other prefix 10 with more digit 4. Table 1.5.2.2-1 System Numbering Plan
ATTRIBUTE Prefix Code More Digit (04) Prefix Code More Digit DESCRIPTION DEFAULT

22

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.2.3 Flexible Station Numbering Plan PGM Code 112

Selecting Flexible Station Number will return the page shown, Figure 1.5.2.3-1. This page permits changes in the Station Numbering Plan using one of three methods: Do Not Use Range Input: use to change an individual station number. Order Range: use to change the station numbers associated with a range of Order Numbers using the Start Station Number as the first station number to assign in the range. The station number is incremented by one over the range of Order numbers. Station Range: use to change station numbers over a range of stations using the Start Station Number as the first station number to assign range. The station number is incremented by one for each successive station in the range. Station Number Search: use to search station number. If station number is searched, the station number table is updated and the searched station number is displayed to red. Selecting a Station Order, blue text in the table header, will display the Station Numbering Plan information for the selected Order Range.

Figure 1.5.2.3-1 Flexible Station Number

23

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.2.4 Flexible Numbering Plan PGM Codes 113

Selecting Feature Numbering of Feature Numbering Plan will return the page shown, Figure 1.5.2.4-1.

Figure 1.5.2.4-1 Flexible Number Plan Feature dial codes for the system can be assigned using the system Flexible Number Plan. Feature codes should be matched System Numbering Plan and must not conflict. The system will not update the database until correct data is entered. provides a brief description for each feature and the default codes as they appear in base Numbering Plan 1. Table 1.5.2.4-1 Feature Numbering Codes
NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Attendant Call Conference Room 1 Conference Room 2 Conference Room 3 Conference Room 4 Conference Room 5 Conference Room 6 Conference Room 7 Conference Room 8 Conference Room 9 FEATURE NAME 0 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 CODE REMARK

24

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.2.4-1 Feature Numbering Codes

NO 11 Internal Page FEATURE NAME 543 CODE REMARK 543 + 00, xx 00: All Call Page Xx: Page Group #

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

Personal VM Page Announcement Page For Attendant Page Auto Answer Internal Page Answer (Meet-Me Page) External Page Internal-External Page All Call Forward Register Pilot Hunt Call Forward Register Pilot Hunt Call Forward Cancel DND Status Change DND Delete Account Code CO Flash Last Number Redial Speed Program Speed Dial Message Wait Register Message Wait Answer Record VM Subscriber Name Call Back Register Call Back Cancel Group Call Pickup Direct Call Pickup Walking COS Call Parking Location

544 545 546 547 548 549 554 514 515 516 517 550 551 552 553 555 557 558 542 518 519 564 7 520 541 541 + xx Xx: Parking Location (0049) 554 + Type + Destination 514 + Type + Destination

37 38 39 40 41

PGM Mode Access Two-Way Record VMIB Access AME Access CO Line Access

521 522 523 524 88 88 + xxx Xxx: CO Line # (001200 : MG-300, 0180 : MG-100)

42 43

External Voice Mail Message Wait Enable External Voice Mail Message Wait Cancel

*8 *9

25

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.2.4-1 Feature Numbering Codes

NO 44 45 46 MCID Request Emergency Alert PTT Group Login/Logout FEATURE NAME *0 563 538 538 + (09,*) 09: PTT Group # *: Log out CODE REMARK

47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

Hot Desk Log In/Log out Station Name Register Create Conference Room Delete Conference Room Wake Up Register Wake Up Cancel Temporarily COS Down Retrieve COS Password Change Interphone Group Access Call Wait Register Pre-Selected Message PGM Forced Handsfree Call Call Base CLIR CLIR Access COLR Access Pilot Hunt Call One-way Command Group Call Conference Command Group Call Intrude Register Camp On Register voice-Over Register Mobile Extension Number Register Mobile Extension CLI Register Mobile Access Announcement table Announcement table and Drop Hold Record VM Greeting System Memo DISA Tone Service All Feature Cancel Add Conference Member

525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 582 583 584 585 581 580 589 590 591 592 593 594 670 671 560 561 675 678 679 680 527 + Conf. Room # 528 + Conf. Room # 529 + HH:MM

26

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.2.4-1 Feature Numbering Codes

NO 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 FEATURE NAME System Alarm Reset Fault Alarm Reset Door Open Keypad Facility T-Net Login/Logout Universal Answer USB Call Record Delete All VM Message VM Page Message Record Direct VM Transfer Loop Key Call Log ACD Agent Login/Logout ACD Agent DND ACD Agent Work Mode ACD Agent Auto Work ACD Agent Auto answer ACD Call Indication Non-ACD Call Indication ACD Supervisor Group Call Forward ACD Supervisor Group Night Mode ACD Supervisor Group Holiday Mode ACD Supervisor Queued Call Answer ACD Supervisor Agent State Check ACD Supervisor Silent Monitor ACD Supervisor Traffic Check ACD Announce Play Day/Night Program DID/DISA Restriction Company Directory Outcall Notification Outcall Attempts Outcall Interval Outcall Phone Number Bath Alarm reset Hotel Maid Status Hotel Mini Bar Hotel Guest Info Display 565 564 #*1 ##* 586 587 588 681 682 683 684 685 500 501 502 503 504 508 509 890 891 892 895 896 897 898 899 513 686 539 596 597 598 599 #10 #11 #12 #13 CODE REMARK

27

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.2.4-1 Feature Numbering Codes

NO 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 FEATURE NAME Hotel Form Feed Hotel Form Feed Hotel VIP Wake Up Cancel Call Forward Device BLF Indication Register Call Forward of a group Cancel Call Forward of a group Selects answer greeting mode Register Call Forward for FOP Cancel Call Forward for FOP Mobile Extension Status change feature code DND State change code about group call in station group Retrieve a held CO line Select auto call record mode Override Hold feature code Override Disconnect feature code Prepaid money input code for Attendant #14 #15 #16 #17 #18 #19 #20 #21 #22 #23 595 #24 #25 #26 #27 #28 #29 CODE REMARK

28

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.2.5 CO Group Access Code - PGM code 114

Selecting CO Group Access Code of Feature Numbering Plan will return the data entry page, Figure 1.5.2.5-1. This page permits changes in the CO Group Access Code using one of two methods: Not Use Range Input: use to change an individual CO Group Access Code. Order Range: use to change the CO Group Access Codes associated with a range of Order Numbers using the Start CO Group Access Code as the first number to assign in the range. The CO group access code is incremented by one over the range of Order numbers.

Figure 1.5.2.5-1 CO Group Access Code

29

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.2.6 Station Group Number - PGM code 115

Selecting Station Group Number of Feature Numbering Plan will return the page shown, Figure 1.5.2.61. This page permits changes in the Station Group Number using one of two methods: Not Use Range Input: use to change an individual station group number. Order Range: use to change the station group numbers associated with a range of Order Numbers using the Start Station Group Number as the first station group number to assign in the range. The station group number is incremented by one over the range of Order numbers.

Figure 1.5.2.6-1 Station Group Number

30

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.2.7 ACD Group Number - PGM code 118

Selecting ACD Group Number of Feature Numbering Plan will return the page shown, Figure 1.5.2.71. This page permits changes in the ACD Group Number using one of two methods: Not Use Range Input: use to change an individual ACD group number. Order Range: use to change the ACD group numbers associated with a range of Order Numbers using the Start ACD Group Number as the first ACD group number to assign in the range. The ACD group number is incremented by one over the range of Order numbers.

Figure 1.5.2.7-1 ACDGroup Number

31

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.3 Station Port Data

Selecting the Station Port Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed, Figure 1.5.3-1.

Figure 1.5.3-1 Station Port Data Sub-menu

32

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.3.1 Station Type PGM Code 120

Selecting Station Type will display the Station Type data page shown, Figure 1.5.3.1-1. Select the Station Order desired shown above table the header, [150], [51100], [101150]. The range selected displays on screen.

Figure 1.5.3.1-1 Station Type The SLT sub-type can be assigned a type used by the system to recognize the stations capability. Additionally, for DSS consoles the associated station is identified. Table 1.5.3.1-1 STATION TYPE
ATTRIBUTE Station Number Slot (ch#) Main Type Sub Type DSS Map Station Number Displays the board name and slot number and channel (port) index at the board. Displays main type of station. Displays the stations type or select SLT type. DSS associated station number or LIP Serial DSS type. DESCRIPTION DEFAULT

33

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.3.2 Station Port Attributes PGM Codes 121124

Selecting Station Port Attributes will display the Station Port Attributes page, Figure 1.5.3.2-1. Enter a valid station range and click [Load] to enter Station Port Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.3.2-1 Station Port Attributes Station Port Attributes define the specific features and functions available to the installed terminal. Generally, the entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to Table 1.5.3.2-1 for a description of the features and the input required.

34

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.3.2-1 STATION PORT ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE Auto Speak Selection Headset Mode DESCRIPTION Enables [SPEAKER] activation when a CO/IP, DSS or other feature button is pressed, no need to lift handset. Select of if Speakerphone mode, Headset mode and Ear Mic Mode. In Headset mode, this item selects device to receive incoming ring signals. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Speaker 1: Headset 2: Ear-Mic 0: Speaker 1: Headset 2: Both 3: Ear-Mic 0: OFF 1: ON DEFAULT ON

Speaker

Headset Ring

Speaker

Group Listening

Enables Group Listen feature, audio is sent to both the handset and speaker with the handset microphone active and speakerphone microphone OFF. Enables station access to the System Database. Enables No-touch answer; this will automatically connect transferred calls to the stations speakerphone. Permits Howler tone to be sent to a SLT when left off-hook. Determines whether a station is used as a Hot Desk terminal (must be set to ON). If this value is set to ON, Station is blocked so it is impossible to use that station. Determines Gain Table for each Station

OFF

Keyset Admin No Touch Answer

0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Table 1 1: Table 2 2: Table 3 0: Short 1: Long 2: Far 0: DISABLE 1: ENABLE 0: DISABLE 1: ENABLE

ON OFF

Howling Tone Dummy Terminal Port Blocking Gain Table Index

ON OFF OFF Table 1

SLT Line Length

This feature is used to distinguish the line length when the distance between SLT station and SLIB board is too variable. (Short: 0km, Long: 03km, Far: 37.5km) Enable to receive system alarm signal. Enable to use door open feature.

Short

System Alarm Report Door Open Access

ENABLE DISABLE

35

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.3.2-1 STATION PORT ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE LCD language Display Mode DESCRIPTION Sets the Language used in the Stations LCD. RANGE 0: English 1: Italian 2: Finnish 3: Dutch 4: Swedish 5: Danish 6: Norwegian 7: Hebrew 8: German 9: French 10: Portuguese 11: Spanish 12: Korean 13: Estonian 14: Russian 15: Turkish 16: Polish 17: Greek 1: DDMMYY 0: MMDDYY 0: 12 Hour Mode 1: 24 Hour Mode 0: Always Off 1: Busy Only 2: Always On 3: Auto (PGM 2817) 4: Delay Off 0: Times New Roman 1: Gothic 115 0: OFF 1: ON 02 0 DEFAULT English

LCD Date Display Mode LCD Time Display Mode Backlight Usage

Sets the Station Date display format as month/ day or day/month. Sets the Time display mode as 12 hour or 24-hour (military) time. If a station can support LCD backlight, you can set backlight usage option.

DD-MM-YY 12 Hour Mode Busy Only

LIP-8000 Phone Font LIP-8000 Phone LCD Brightness Station Group Queue Display IDLE Soft Menu Type

Determines the Font for LIP-8000 Series between Times New Roman and Gothic. LIP 8000 Series terminal can adjust LCD brightness. If this value set to ON, Queue Information of station group is display to member of group. Sets Idle soft menu for each station. Type1( LOG/DIR/REDIAL) Type2(LOG/DIR/PICKUP) Type3(LOG/PICKUP/REDIAL Among My-DN and several Sub-DNs which are assigned to station flex buttons, determines the first-seized DN when the user initiates a call. If set, the system scans sequentially from FLEX 1-48 and takes the unused and valid flexible button as prime button. NOTE DN buttons on an associated DSS box cannot be a prime number button.

Gothic

7 OFF

Prime Number Button (148)

148

Zone Number (1 9)

Determines the zone where a station belongs.

19

36

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.3.2-1 STATION PORT ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE Automatic Hold DESCRIPTION Enables Auto Hold for the station. With Auto Hold enabled, the system will place an active external call on hold if the user presses a CO/ IP or DSS button. If set to All, user-dialed digits are stored at the Digital Phone until explicitly sent by the user. When sent, all dialed digits are sent to the system in a bloc (only available to Digital Phones with soft keys). Selects Handsfree, Tone or Privacy ring ICM Signaling mode. Disables override and camp-on tones to the station to avoid encountering an error when sending data. If this value is set to ON, Progress Indicator Information is included to Setup message (Origin is non-ISDN, like modem or analogue FAX) If this value is set to ON, Bearer Capability information with 3.1Khz is provided to PX. (If SLT or analogue FAX accesses ISDN, only 3.1 KHz Audio is available) If this value is set to ON, Station can use Call Wait/Voice Over/Override feature though busy station is set to Auto Privacy, Voice Over rejection If this value is set to MUTE RING 1~8, system provides MUTE RING 1~8 to user. If this value is set to NO RING, system does not provide MUTE RING If this value is set to AUTO, system provides Auto Idle service. When a busy station receive Call Wait request, call wait indication can be provided. (None, Tone, Mute ring) During ICM call, user can check call duration time with this admin. When ICM call, call-time can be displayed on user LCD of digital keyset. When prepaid money is used, current cost or left money can be displayed on user LCD of digital keyset. Determines the way to notify a station of wait message. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON DEFAULT OFF

Enblock Dial Mode

0: Off 1: All 2: On Hook Dialing 3: Dialing in Ring 1: Handfree 2: Tone 3: Privacy 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON

Off

Intercom Answer Mode Data Line Security

Tone

OFF

Sending Progress Indicator

OFF

FAX Mode

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Emergency Supervisor

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Mute Ring Service

1-8: Mute Ring (1-8) 9: No Ring 0: Auto 1: Manual 0: NONE 1: TONE 2: MUTE RING 0: OFF 1: ON

No Ring

Auto Idle Service Call Wait Indication ICM Call Duration Time Display

Auto MUTE RING

OFF

Prepaid Call Cost Display Message-Wait Indication

0: Left Money 1: Used Money 2: Call Time 0: Not Assigned 1: RING LED 2: MW Remind Tone 3: RING LED + Remind Tone

Left Money

MW Remind Tone

37

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.3.2-1 STATION PORT ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE Apply Differential Ring Intercom Differential Ring ID (0168) DESCRIPTION Determines differential ring mode. RANGE 0: All Ring 1: Normal Ring Only LDP: 1-15 Music Bell: 129-168 LIP: 1-8 Etc.: 1-4 LDP: 1-15 Music Bell: 129-168 LIP: 1-8 Etc.: 1-4 0: SUB-DN 1: MY-DN 0: Cancel transfer 1: Broker Call 2: Conference 3: Conference after Broker Call DEFAULT All Ring

Sets the intercom differential ring ID (14 usually valid).

CO Differential Ring ID (0168)

Sets the CO line differential ring ID (14 usually valid).

COS Apply

Determine whether the applied COS is the COS of SUB-DN or COS of MY-DN when station accesses SUB-DN. Determines the operation when the user presses the hook-flash button while transferring a call. 0. Cancel transfer: drops current call and recover previous call. 1. Broker Call: holds current call and recover previous held call. 2. Conference: establishes 3-way conference call. 3. Conference after Broker Call: establishes conference when hook flash within 2 sec in broker call. When lifting handset while listening to paging message, user can make another call or continue to listen. 0: continue to listen to paging message. 1: stop listening, seize a DN, and hear dial tone. User can make another call. Enables Ringing Line Preference for the station. Calls that ring the telephone are answered by going off-hook (Reserved). This value determines the method of pickup when pressing DSS button. Set the CLI IP Address When station is member of ACD Group, this value will be used for priority as agent. When station make intercom call, this ring ID can be provided to called party.

SUB-DN

Hook Flash When Transfer

Cancel transfer

Off-Hook On Paged

0: PAGED 1: DIAL-TONE

PAGED

Preferred Line Answer Pick-Up By DSS Button CTI IP Address ACD Agent Priority Intercom Caller Ring ID

0: OFF 1: ON 0: Disable 1: Group Pickup 2: Direct Pickup IP Address 0120 LDP : 1 ~ 15 LDP Music Bell : 129 ~ 168 LIP : 1 ~ 8 0

ON

Direct Pickup

0.0.0.0 10

38

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.3.3 Flexible Button Assignment PGM Code 126

Selecting Flex Button Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.3.3-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter Flex button data.

Figure 1.5.3.3-1 Flex Buttons Assignment 3. Each Flex button for each station can be assigned to a function (TYPE) as listed. 4. After selecting the Type for a button, enter the value (needed).

39

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

ATTRIBUTE Type

DESCRIPTION Select button type from available choices: Not Assigned Station DSS: assign station DSS button CO Number: assign CO line button Loop key: assign Loop Key CO Group Access: assign CO Group Access Code Station Group Number: assign Station Group Number ACD Group Number: assign ACD Group Number Dial Number: assign feature code or digits Directory Number: assign Directory Number Redial: assign [REDIAL] button Speed: assign [SPEED] button Conference: assign [REDIAL] button Mute: assign [MUTE] button Call Back: assign [CALL BK] button DND/FWD: assign [DND/FORWARD] button Transfer: assign [TRANSFER] button Flash: assign [FLASH] button PTT: assign [PTT] button Station Number (if button is Directory Number type) or Dial digit The Ring Option of Directory Number Determines Directory Number access type if button is Directory Number type. 0. All call: there is no restriction. 1. Dial After Seizure: Unable to seize only by off-hook when making outgoing calls even if the button is set to prime number button. First, you must press the button occupies DN. 2. Incoming only: Unable to make an outgoing call using this button and only answering incoming call is allowed. Or, Button Assignment privilege at the station if button is Dial Number type. Button Name

RANGE

DEFAULT

Value Ring Option Access type

Name

40

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.3.4 CTI IP Address Assignment

Selecting CTI IP Address will display the CTI IP Address data input entry page, Figure 1.5.3.4-1. Select the Station Order desired shown above table the header, [150], [51100], [101150]; the range selected will display.

Figure 1.5.3.4-1 CTI IP Address Assignment CTI IP Address defines the PC IP Address to be integrated as first party CTI Application.

41

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4 Station Number Data

Selecting the Station Number Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed, Figure 1.5.4-1.

Figure 1.5.4-1 Station Number Data sub-menu

42

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.1 Station DN (Directory Number) Assignment PGM Code 130

Selecting Station DN Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.1-1. 1. Enter a valid station directory number. 2. Click [Load] button to assign DN.

Figure 1.5.4.1-1 SADN Assignment

Figure 1.5.4.1-2 MADN Assignment

43

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

In accordance with its physical characteristics, the station number is divided into My-DN and Sub-DN. My-DN is Single-Assign Directory Number (SADN) and one My-DN is assigned to a physical terminal only. In the iPECS-MG system, the range of the station numbers used for My-DN is predefined the station bin index from 1 to 324 for MG-300, from 1 to 120 for MG-100. Station number with station bin index greater than My-DNs bin index is Sub-DN. Sub-DN is used for MADN or SADN. Multi-Assign Directory Number (MADN). When Sub-DN is used for SADN, one Sub-DN can be used only for a station. When Sub-DN is used for MADN, one Sub-DN can 10 different stations. In addition to, Sub-DN, which is used for SADN, can be configured as a hot-desk agent number. If Sub-DN is used as a hot-desk agent, the station is not allocated explicitly for Sub-DN member. Only when a terminal login to Hot Desk with Sub-DN, Sub-DN has the terminals station number (My-DN) as its member. Table 1.5.4.1-1 Station DN Assignment
ATTRIBUTE Index Station Number Flexible Button No. Ring Option Access Type DESCRIPTION The index of DN Member My-DN station number to be assigned as DN member The button number to assign DN to My-DN station Ring option for DN Access type of DN 0. All call: there is no restriction. 1. Dial After Seizure: Unable to seize only by off-hook when making outgoing call even if the button is set to prime number button. First, you must press the button occupies DN. 2. Incoming only: Unable to make an outgoing call using this button. Only answering incoming call is allowed. Select button for assigning the DN as Prime-DN Prime-DN is a Directory Number that is used when user makes outgoing call without seizure of any DN button DEFAULT

Use DN as Prime-DN

44

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.2 Station Directory Number Attributes PGM Codes 131135

Selecting Station DN Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.2-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] button to enter Station DN Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.4.2-1 Station Directory Number Attributes Station Directory Number Attributes define features available to the station directory number. Generally, the entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to Table 1.5.4.2-1 for a description of the features and the input required.

45

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.2-1 Station Directory Number Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Station Name Tenant Group Digit Conversion Table Password DESCRIPTION Enables user name entry. The name is displayed on the LCD of Digital Phones. Specifies tenant group for station. Specifies Digit conversion table for station. Password is employed to control access to the system resources and facilities. Walking COS, CO/IP Group access of DISA callers and certain Call Forward types may require the input of a valid password. When a station is busy and if another new call arrives, station treats this new call base on this option. If FREE, the intercom call is not printed/saved to SMDR even though ICM CALL SMDR is enabled. If REPORT, the intercom call is included to SMDR according to the ICM CALL SMDR Attributes. If enabled and station makes an outgoing call, then dialed digit in SMDR data can be shown with hidden digit rule by SMDR attribute. If disabled, all dialed digits will be displayed. Permits a station number as Hot Desk agent number. To make this feature effective, station number must be Sub-DN & SADN. Specify Time Table index for station. Set R2 category for the station. SIP User table index for SIP outgoing call`s caller ID information. If none, then iPECS-MG system makes caller ID based on SIP CO User-ID Table Index value in User ID Start Index in PGM 371. If 01~72, then programmed ID in SIP CO User-ID Table (PGM code 373) is used. When placing an intercom call, a user can change the ICM signaling mode, Tone Ring to Hands free answer mode or Hands free answer to Tone Ring mode. Enables Call Forward to be activated by the station. A station must be allowed Off Net Fwd to forward external incoming calls outside the system or establish other CO-to-CO connection. Enables DND to be activated by the station. Enables intrusion to gain access to an active call. RANGE Max. 16 Chars 19 (MG-300) 15 (MG-100) 19 012 digits 1 1 DEFAULT

Busy Service

0: Busy Tone 1: Camp-on 2: Call Wait 3: Pilot Hunt 0: Free 1: Report

Busy Tone

Charge Mode

Report

SMDR Dialed Digit Hidden

0: Disable 1: Enable

Disable

Hot Desk Agent Number Time Table Index R2 Category SIP User ID Table

0: OFF 1: ON 19, None 1-15 1~72 (MG-300) 1~24 (MG-100)

OFF

None 1 None

Forced Handsfree Access

0: Disable 1: Enable

Disable

Forward Access Offnet-Forward Access DND Access Intrusion Access

0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable

Enable Enable

Enable Disable

46

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.2-1 Station Directory Number Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Mobile Extension Access Hook Flash Mode DESCRIPTION Enables mobile extension ability. Determines the operation when the SLT user presses the hook-flash button during a conversation. 0. FLASH NORMAL: Hook Flash can be detected. In addition, it will be operated as normal case flow. 1. FLASH IGNORE: Hook Flash cannot be detected. All of hook flash will be ignored at any time. 2. FLASH DROP: When Hook Flash is detected, the line will be disconnected. 3. HOLD RELEASE: When Hook Flash is detected, the line will be held and then On-Hook is detected, the line will be disconnected. If a group member phone is ringing, another member of the Group can Pick-Up a call ringing at the member station by simply going Off-hook. If this value is set to 1, 2, or 3, a user should enter the authorization code for some specific cases as below. 0. OFF - Disable 1. CO Access Only - Only when a user accesses CO line, system requests authorization code(station number + password, or * + ID + Password) 2. Authorization Table User dials digits in authorization table, system requests authorization code(station number + password, or * + ID + Password) 3. CO Access, Authorization Table - When a user accesses CO line or user dials digits in authorization table, system requests authorization code(station number + password, or * + ID + Password) Enables CO Queuing. Enables Conference call. Enables Wake-up Alarm feature. Enables call back feature when a called station is busy. Enables ACNR feature. Enables Absence notice feature. Enables to leave a call wait when a called station does not answer or is in DND state. RANGE 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: FLASH NORMAL 1: FLASH IGNORE 2: FLASH DROP 3: HOLD RELEASE DEFAULT Enable FLASH NORMAL

Auto Pickup

0: Disable 1: Enable

Disable

Authorization Usage

0: Off 1: CO Access 2: Authorization Table 3: CO, Authorization Table

OFF

CO Queue Access Conference Access Wake-up Access Station Call Back Access ACNR Access Absence Notice Access Call Wait Access

0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable

Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable

47

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.2-1 Station Directory Number Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Camp-on Access Voice Over Access Rejection of Voice Over Prepaid Call Usage Keypad Facility Usage Speed Access Page Access Meet-Me Access Call Duration Restriction Table DESCRIPTION Enables camp-on feature. Enables voice over feature. Enable of rejection authority about voice over feature. Enables prepaid call. Enable keypad facility. Enables station speed dial bin access authority. Permits station to make page. Enables meet me feature when there is a page made. CDR Table number for Reference to check the CDR rule. If table number is assigned, when user make call, defined CDR rule will be applied. If this enabeld , when SLT extension attempts to transfer a CO call to a CO line it is blocked and the call is released. Permits station to receive pilot hunt ring. Sets Anonymous Call Restrict service. You can assign five different wake-up settings with each mode. There are five types of wake-up mode. 1. Once 2. Daily 3. Monday Friday 4. Monday Saturday 5. Specific Date/Time Enables branch line feature. Branch: Press the {DN} button used, the conference call is established. Bridge by pressing DN: Press the {DN} button used, bridge call is connected. Auto Bridge if Phontage/UCS Clients IP Bridge is enabled (softphone): If Phontage or UC client's IP is enabled, the bridge will be made automatically. Enables auto privacy feature (to restrict the intrusion/call-wait/camp-on/OHVA at a busy station). If set, incoming DID and DISA calls to DN are restricted. RANGE 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 00:Not-Used 01-30 DEFAULT Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Not-Used

SLT Block Back Call Pilot Hunt Ring ACR User Wake-Up Time 15

0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: OFF 1: ON HH:MM

Disable

Enable OFF

Branch Line/Bridge Line Mode

0: OFF 1: Branch 2: Bridge by pressing DN. 3: Auto Bridge if Phontage/UCS Client`s IP Bridge is enabled. 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Auto Privacy

OFF

DID/DISA Restriction

OFF

48

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.2-1 Station Directory Number Attributes

ATTRIBUTE DID/DISA Restriction LCD Display CLIP Display DESCRIPTION If set, when DID/DISA Restriction is enabled, LCD shows this information. CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation), an ISDN service, sends the number of the calling party to the system in the call SETUP message. If enabled, the number will be shown in the Digital phone LCD. COLP (Connected Line Id Presentation), an ISDN service, sends the number of the answering party to the system in the call CONNECT message. If enabled, the number will be shown in the Digital Phone LCD. When an incoming ISDN call is redirected, the call SETUP message will contain an original and redirected CLI. This selection determines if the Digital Phone will display the original or redirected CLI number. CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction), an ISDN service, removes calling party ID sent from the PSTN to the called party with a RESTRICT instruction in the SETUP message. If enabled, the system will send RESTRICT instruction to the PSTN when an outgoing ISDN call is placed. COLR (Connected Line Id Restriction), an ISDN service, removes connected party ID sent from the PSTN to the calling party with a RESTRICT instruction in the CONNECT message. If enabled, the system will send the restrict instruction to the PSTN when the station answers an ISDN call. When not restricted (by using CLIR/COLR above), entry configured is added to the number sent in the ISDN call SETUP or CONNECT message in place of the station number. When an incoming ISDN call is forwarded to other ISDN CO, the call SETUP message will contain an original and redirected CLI. This selection determines if SETUP includes the original or redirected CLI number. If it is enabled, when a call with CLIR option is received, option will be ignored and CLI will be displayed. When mobile extension makes a call, CLI is determined by this option. 0: Caller Number 1: Mobile Station Number 2: (Caller + Mobile Station) Number RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Disable 1: Enable DEFAULT ON

Enable

COLP Display

0: Disable 1: Enable

Enable

CLI/Redirect

0: Original CLI 1: Redirect CLI

Original CLI

CLIR When Outgoing

0: Disable 1: Enable

Disable

COLR When Incoming Answer

0: Disable 1: Enable

Disable

CLI Number

24 digits

Call Forward CLI/ Redirect

0: Original CLI 1: Redirect CLI

Original CLI

Ignore Callers CLIR option Mobile Extension CLI

0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Caller Number 1: Mobile Station Number 2: (Caller+Mobile Station) Number 24 digits

Disable

Caller Number

Long CLI 1

If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1, (Long CLI 1), Long CLI 1 is sent.

49

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.2-1 Station Directory Number Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Long CLI 2 Long CLI 3 CLI Name Display DESCRIPTION If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 2, (Long CLI 2), LOng CLI 2 is sent. If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 3, (Long CLI 3), Long CLI 3 is sent. This feature determines whether to display the CLI name. If it is enabled, following name will be searched and display if programmed. 1. Flexible button label name with this CLI number. 2. Station Speed Bin Name. 3. System Speed Bin Name. 4. Received CLI Name. If this is set to ON, station number is not displayed at calling or called party LCD. When a station makes transfer call, call SETUP message will contain an transferor or transferred CLI. This feature determines which CLI will be used. RANGE 24 digits 24 digits 0: Disable 1: Enable Disable DEFAULT

Station No. Hidden Call Transfer CLI

0: OFF 1: ON 0: Transferor 1: Transferred

OFF Transferor

1.5.4.3 Station Private CO Group Attributes - PGM Code 136

Selecting Private CO Group Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.3-1.

50

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Station Private CO Group data.

Figure 1.5.4.3-1 Station Private CO Attributes Station Private CO Group Attributes defines CO group code and a private CO line for private CO group of each station. Table 1.5.4.3-1 Station Private CO Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Private CO Usage DESCRIPTION Determines seize mode 0. OFF : Disable Private CO Group operation. 1. Private CO: if all private CO line is busy, a user hears busy tone. 2. Private & Normal: if all private CO line is busy, a system seizes normal CO line related to CO Group access code. 3. Normal & Private: if all CO line in CO Group is busy, a system seizes private CO line. Determines CO group access code for Private CO Group 1. Determines 1st ~5th CO line number for Private CO group 1. Determines CO group access code for Private CO Group 2. RANGE 0-2 0: OFF 1: Private CO 2: Private & Normal 3: Normal & Private DEFAULT OFF

Private CO Group 1 CO Group Access Code Private CO Group 1 1st ~5th CO line Private CO Group 2 CO Group Access Code

Max 8 digits

001-240 (MG-300) 01-80(MG-100) Max 8 digits

51

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.3-1 Station Private CO Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Private CO Group 2 1st ~5th CO line DESCRIPTION Determines 1st ~5th CO line number for Private CO group 2. RANGE 001-240 (MG-300) 01-80(MG-100) DEFAULT

52

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.4 Station COS Assignment PGM Code 137

Selecting COS Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.4-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Station COS data.

Figure 1.5.4.4-1 Station COS Assignment All stations are assigned to a Class-of-Service (COS), which determines the ability of the user to dial certain types of calls. Separate COS assignments are configured for Day, Night and Timed Mode operation. As a default all stations are assigned with a Station COS of 1 for all modes, no restrictions. Table 1.5.4.4-1 Station Class-Of-Service
STATION COS 0 1 215 RESTRICTIONS Intercom and Emergency number calls are allowed. Incoming and transferred calls are allowed. No restrictions are placed on dialing. Configured toll exception tables for these COS are monitored for allow and deny numbers. If a table has no entries, no restrictions are applied. If there are only Deny entries, restrictions are provided as Deny only. If there are only Allow entries, restrictions are provided as Allow only. If there are both Allow and Deny entries, the Deny entries are searched. If the dialed number matches a Deny entry, the call is restricted; if no match is found the call is allowed.

53

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.5 Station Auto Dial Attribute PGM Code 138

Selecting Auto Dial Attribute will display the Station page shown, Figure 1.5.4.5-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Station Auto Dial Attribute.

Figure 1.5.4.5-1 Station Auto Dial Attribute When a station goes off-hook (lifts handset or presses [Speaker] button), the system normally provides an intercom dial tone. In place of the dial tone, the station can be programmed to dial preprogrammed Auto-Dial Digit. If Auto Dial Digits is configured, and if no digit is entered within the auto dial pause time after off-hook, is then the system will dial the digits in Auto Dial Digit automatically. Table 1.5.4.5-1 Station Auto Dial Attribute
ATTRIBUTE Auto Dial Digit Auto Dial Pause Time DESCRIPTION Digits will be dialed automatically Max. 16 digits. Auto dial pause time. DEFAULT

54

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.6 Preset Call Forward PGM Code 142

Selecting Preset Call Forward will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.6-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Station Preset Call Forward data.

Figure 1.5.4.6-1 Preset Call Forward Stations can be programmed so that incoming CO and Intercom calls are forwarded to a preset station or station group. This allows an external call or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a pre-determined destination. Preset Forward can be separately assigned Internal Unconditional, Internal Busy, Internal No Answer, Internal DND, External Unconditional, External Busy, External No Answer, External DND or ON Failure (Eject) preset forwarding to any station, station group or external number. As a default, no Preset Call Forward is assigned.

55

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.7 Call Forward PGM Code 143

Selecting Call Forward will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.7-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Station Call Forward data.

Figure 1.5.4.7-1 Call Forward Stations can be programmed so that incoming CO and Intercom calls are forwarded to a station, station group or external number. Table 1.5.4.7-1 Station Call Forward
ATTRIBUTE Forward Type DESCRIPTION Specify call forward type. RANGE 0: Not Assigned 1: Unconditional 2: Busy 3: No Answer 4: Busy or No Answer Max. 32 digits 0: All / 1: Day 2: Night / 3: Timed (0600) sec DEFAULT Not Assigned

Forward Number Forward Apply Time CFW No-Answer Timer Forward Information Display

Specify Call Forward Destination by entering dial digits. Specify Call Forward Applying Time. Call is forwarded to Call Forward Destination, if station does not respond during this CFW NO ANS TMR timer. Enables Forward information Display Option to display forward information during idle state.

ALL 15

0: OFF 1: ON

ON

56

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.8 VMIB Attribute PGM Code 145, 147

Selecting VMIB Attribute will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.8-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Station VMIB Attribute Data.

Figure 1.5.4.8-1 VMIB Attribute Station VMIB Attributes define VMIB features available to the station directory number.

57

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.8-1 Station VMIB Attributes

ATTRIBUTE VMIB Access Prompt Language Index DESCRIPTION Permits station access to VMIB. Selected language type prompt is played to the user when accessing the VMIB. When allowed, if user is in conversation with internal/ external users, their conversation will be automatically recorded. It can be used without two-way record button. When allowed, the station can activate the Two-way record feature to record a conversation. It defines the location of Two-Way recorded wav files. When VM Boards, recorded wav files are saved at internal VM boards. In addition, if assign specific Phontage and this Phontage is supportable s/w version (Delux version), recorded wav files is saved at hard disk of Phontage program installed PC. When station has new voice mail in VM internal boards, this information is reported to assigned Phontage number. In addition, Phontage user can backup these saved voice mail from VM internal boards to hard disk of Phontage program installed PC. When it is enabled, Phontage user can delete all voice mail in VM internal boards. Messages stored in the VMIB may be retrieved in either a FIFO (first-in-first-out) or LIFO (last-in-first-out) order based on this entry. Display the number of urgent messages. Displays the number of new messages. Displays the number of saved messages. First name of the user can be programmed for the name search in company directory feature. Last name of the user can be programmed for the name search in company directory feature. Administrator features for voice mail can be allowed or disallowed for the user. If enabled and station is forwarded to voice mail, only the station greeting is played without recording. After accessing announce-only mailbox, the call can be routed back to CCR previous menu or hanged up. 0: Disable 1: Enable 1: LIFO 0: FIFO 0~250 0~250 0~250 Max. 12 Max. 12 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Previous Menu 1: Hang up Max. 8 Disable Disable Previous Menu Disable LIFO RANGE 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: First 1: Second 2: Thired 0: Disable 1: Enable DEFAULT Disable First

Auto-Record Service

Disable

Two-Way Record Access Two-Way Recording Destination

0: Disable 1: Enable Empty Digit

Disable Empty (VM Internal Boards).

VM Message Backup Phontage Number

VM Message Backup Delete Option VMIB Message Retrieve Type VMIB Urgent Message No VMIB New Message No VMIB Saved Message No Company Directory First Name Company Directory Last Name Administrator Mail Box Announce only Mail Box Announce only Option

0 0 0

Cascade Mail Box

If the station receives a voice message, it is copied to the cascade mailbox automatically.

58

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.8-1 Station VMIB Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Cascade Type DESCRIPTION The voice message cascade feature can be disabled, or performed immediately when voice message is left, or only when outcall notification fails, or only for urgent messages. The class of service for voice mail features. When a voice message is left to a station, it can be notified to an outside telephone. The number of attempts for outcall notification can be set here. Between each retrial of outcall notification, the interval can be set here. The telephone number for voice message notification can be set here including trunk access code. SMTP Mail Server Address. User Mail Address that will receive the e-mail. SMTP Mail Server ID. SMTP Mail Server Password. Sender Mail Address that will be put in the senders address field in the e-mail. This provides 3 options: Do not attach message in e-mail. Attach message only. Attach message and delete it from board. When Rerouting from Voice Mail Forward function is used, this destination is used. When user voice message is checked, this determines the period to play time/date prompt IP address IP address Max. 20 Max. 20 Max. 48 0: Off 1: Attach only 2: Attach & Delete 8 digits 0: Before Msg 1: After Msg 2: Off 0000-9999 01-18 1: Extension + Password 2: Password 3: No Password Before Msg Off RANGE 0: Off 1: Immediate 2: Noti Fail 3: Urgent 1-5 0: OFF 1: ON 1-9 01 60 (minutes) DEFAULT Off

VM COS Outcall Notification Outcall Attempts Outcall Interval Outcall Phone Number VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server Address VM MSG-User Mail Address VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server ID VM MSG - SMTP Mail Server Password VM MSG SMTP Mail Sender Address VM MSG Attach Message

1 OFF 3 03

VM Forward Reroute Destination Message Date/Time Prompt

SMTP Port Number (0000~9999) VM Slot No (01-18) VM Password Input

Each DN can have its own SMTP port number for VM E-mail notification. If VM Slot No is assigned for a DN, all voicemail messages for the DN will be stored at that board. Password input method to access voice mailbox.

0025 Not Assigned Extension + Password

59

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.4.8-1 Station VMIB Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Msg RW/FF Time (03~99) DESCRIPTION This specifies the unit amount of time when user message is rewound or fast forwarded during play-back. RANGE 03-99 DEFAULT 03

1.5.4.9 Mobile Phone Attribute PGM Code 146

Selecting Mobile Phone Attribute will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.9-1. Enter a valid station range and click [Load] to enter the Station Mobile Phone Attribute Data.

Figure 1.5.4.9-1 Mobile Phone Attribute A mobile phone can be used in conjunction with a station. The Mobile phone can access system resources available to the users wired phone and will receive ringing for incoming calls. The user may be allowed to enable the Mobile extension and define the mobile number. Table 1.5.4.9-1 Mobile Phone Attributes
ATTRIBUTE EXT.ID Mobile enable Number CLI Mobile Service Mode DESCRIPTION Mobile phone index Enable mobile extension ability. Mobile extension number Mobile extension CLI number Select apply mobile service to ALL call or CLI1CLI5. 0: ALL call Enable Mobile extension service for all call. 1: Service CLI only Enable Mobile extension service for only Mobile extension CLI number (CLI1~CLI5). CLI for Mobile Service 0: OFF 1: ON Max. 24 digits Max. 24 digits 0: ALL Call 1: Service CLI only OFF ALL Call RANGE DEFAULT

Mobile Service CLI (15)

60

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.10 CO/IP Group Access PGM Code 150

Selecting CO/IP Group Access will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.10-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter CO/IP Group Access data. 3. Check the appropriate boxes to allow or delete access to each CO/IP Group.

Figure 1.5.4.10-1 CO/IP Group Access Stations can be allowed or denied access to CO Lines and IP Channels by group. As a default, all stations are allowed access to group 1.

61

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.11 Internal Page Group Access PGM Code 151

Selecting Internal Page Group Access will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.11-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Internal Page Group Access data. 3. Check the appropriate boxes to allow or delete access to each Internal Group Zone.

Figure 1.5.4.11-1 Internal Page Group Access Each station is assigned for making announcements to each Internal Page Group.

62

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.4.12 Command Conference Group Access PGM Code 152

Selecting Command Conference Group Access will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.4.12-1. 1. Enter a valid station range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Command Conference Group Access data. 3. Check the appropriate boxes to allow or delete access to each Command Conference Group.

Figure 1.5.4.12-1 Command Conference Group Access Stations can be allowed or denied access to Command Conference Group. If a station has command conference group access, the user can make a command conference call (if command conference group members are assigned). As a default, all stations are denied to access to all groups.

63

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5 CO Line Data

Selecting the CO Line Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed, Figure 1.5.5-1.

Figure 1.5.5-1 CO Line Data

64

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.1 CO Line Attribute PGM Codes 160163

Selecting CO Line Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.1-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO Line Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.5.1-1 CO Line Attribute CO Attributes define various characteristics of CO lines.

65

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.1-1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE CO Type Service Type Outgoing Group No DESCRIPTION Displays the line type of selected CO line. Sets CO line type as DID or Normal. Sets CO Group Number to apply to outgoing calls. If deleted, the selected CO couldn't be used. Sets CO Group Number to apply to incoming calls. Sets Tenant group number to apply to CO lines. Sets Digit Conversion Table index. Can set the destination for each DID number using Digit Conversion Table. Sets Answer Signal Type. RANGE Display only 0: Normal 1: DID 0172, None (MG-300) 0124, None (MG-100) 0. Normal 01 DEFAULT

Incoming Group No Tenant No Digit Conversion Table

0172, None (MG-300) 0124, None (MG-100) 19 (MG-300) 15 (MG-100) 19

01 1 1

Signal Type

0: No Signal 1: Send Wink (IC) 2: Wait Seize Ack (OG) 3: Send Wink & Wait Sz Ack 4: Send & Wait Sub-Answer 5: Send Wink & Send Sub-Answer (IC) 6: Wait Ack & Send Sub-Answer (OG) 7: Send All & Wait All 0: First Release 1: Caller Release 2: Called Release

No Signal

Release Timing

If Release Timing is set to first release, CO line is released when one party releases the call. If Caller or Called Release is set, CO line is released when caller or called party releases the call. Each CO line can be set to only allow incoming or outgoing calls. One of following dialing signal type can be selected; DTMF, Pulse, R2MFC.

First Release

Incoming/Outgoing Mode

0: Incoming 1: Outgoing 2: Both 0: DTMF 1: PULSE 2: R2

Both

Dialing Type

DTMF

66

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.1-1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE Charge Mode DESCRIPTION Each CO line can be set whether it will be charged or not. FREE: SMDR data is not printed/saved even though SMDR is enabled. ALL CALL REPORT: SMDR data about all of call is printed/saved according to the SMDR Attributes. OUTGOING CALL REPORT: SMDR data about only outgoing call is printed/saved according to the SMDR Attributes. INCOMING CALL REPORT: SMDR data about only incoming call is printed/ saved according to the SMDR Attributes. According to PSTN service type, metering type can be selected among 0013 to manage call charge. 01- 06 can be applied to LCO lines, 0712 can be applied to ISDN lines. 13 can be an applied to all. RANGE 0: Free 1: All Call Report 2: Outgoing Report 3: Incoming Report DEFAULT All Call Report

Metering Usage

00: None 01: 12KHz 02: 16KHz 03: 50KHz 04: Single Polarity Reverse (SPR) 05: Plural Polarity Reverse (PPR) 06: No Polarity Reverse (NPR) 07: AOC 0 (Standard) 08: AOC 1 (Italy & Spain) 09: AOC 2 (Finland) 10: AOC 3 (Australia) 11: AOC 4 (Belgium) 12: AOC 5 (Netherlands) 13: TIME Not Assigned 1: SIP/PRI (E1) 2: H.323 3: H.450/QSIG (E1) 4: PRI (T1) 5: QSIG (T1)

None

CO Service mode

One of SIP (or PRI), H.323 (or BRI) or Qsig type can be selected for each VOIP (or ISDN) lines. SIP/PRI : VOIB line is used for SIP or PRI line. H.323/BRI : VOIB line is used for H.323/Gatekeeper or BRI line. QSIG : VOIB or PRI line is used for Voice Networking. T1 PRI : It is used for T1 PRI line. T1 QSIG : T1 PRI line is used for Voice Networking. LCO line drop type LCO line Flash type

Drop Type Flash type

0: Loop 1: Polarity 0: Loop 1: Ground

Loop Loop

67

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.1-1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE Flash timer Open Loop timer Line Length DESCRIPTION CO Flash Timer Open Loop Timer LCO line length RANGE 000300(10ms base) 0020(100ms base) 0: 0km 1: 3km 2: 5km 3: 7km 19 0: First Prompt 1: Second Prompt 2: Third Prompt DEFAULT 50 00 0km

Zone No VMIB Prompt Language Index

Zone number of CO lines VMIB Prompt Sets the language of CO lines. Using CO line, announcement/ Prompt is provided for each VMB Prompt language. Gain table for each CO line

1 First Prompt

Gain Table index

0: Table 1 1: Table 2 2: Table 3 0: OFF 1: ON

Table 1

VOIP FW Usage

For H.323 call, if VOIP CO is behind NAT, , this admin should be configured to ON. And Firewall IP Address in PGM 108 is used. For H.323 Networking call, Firewall Routing field in PGM 321 is used. This determines that detect line fault or not. Determines Tone table index to provide Tone for CO line. If this value is not assigned, a system refers to tenant tone table index. This determines the retrial count of voice mail services when theres no available voice mail channel. Blocked Line : If you do not use the trunk, it will be Blocked. Normal CO Line : Normal CO Line attributes are applied to CDR. Dedicated Line : Dedicated Line attributes are applied to CDR. CO lines can be set to send digit with overlap. Overlap: When you dial a number, it will be sent for each digit. Enblock: When you dial a number, it will be sent at once together.

ON

Line Monitor Tone Table Index

0: OFF 1: ON 1-9, NOT ASG

ON NOT ASG

VM Service Retry Count

000-100

000

CO Access Mode

0: Blocked Line 1: Normal CO Line 2: Dedicated Line

Normal CO Line

Digit Sending Mode

0: Overlap 1: Enblock

Overlap

68

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.1-1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE Max. Digit Length DESCRIPTION Maximum number of dialed digits can be limited with this admin. Maximum number of digits can be for overlap dialing. If it is set with 01-32, then SETUP message will not be sent to network until these minimum digits are dialed. Reserved R2 line connection mode can be set. END-TO-END : iPECS-MG system control the all signals of outgoing call. Set in the general case. LINK BY LINK : iPECS-MG system operates as tandem switch. In this case, iPECS-MG system bypasses the signal. R2MFC Backward Value When CO line is seized, dummy dial tone can be provided for in case if PSTN does not provide it. Determines if Loop or Ground is selected for each T1 Digital lines. Determines if Immediate, Wink, Delay Wink is selected for each T1 DID lines. CID signal type can be assigned according to the CID type PSTN provides. 0032 RANGE DEFAULT 32

Min. Digit Length for Overlap Mode

0032

00

Check Password R2 Connect Mode

0: OFF 1: ON 0: END-TO-END 1: LINK-BY-LINK

OFF ENE-TO-END

R2MFC Backward Value Dummy Dial-Tone Service

115 0: OFF 1: ON

1 OFF

T1 Normal Mode

0: Loop 1: Ground 0: Immediate 1: Wink 2: Delay Wink 0: Disabled 1: FSK 2 : DTAS FSK 3: DTMF 4: R-CID 0: LOCAL 1: ALL 0: USER 1: AUTO 410 1300 (sec) 13 10150 (10msec) 1030 (10msec)

Loop

T1 DID Mode

WINK

CID Mode

FSK

RCID Detect RCID Request RCID Digit Number RCID No-Answer Timer RCID Request Count RCID Request First Delay Timer RCID Request Retry Daly Timer

Russia CID Detect Mode Russia CID Request Mode Russia CID Digit Number Russia CID NO-Answer Timer Russia CID Request Count Russia CID First Delay Timer Russia CID Retry Delay Timer

ALL AUTO 7 20 1 20 10

69

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.1-1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE CID Detection Timer DESCRIPTION CID Signal Detection Timer. When CID type is FSK or DTAS-FSK or RCID, during this time, system tries to detect CID. RANGE 001-100 (100msec) DEFAULT 40

70

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.2 Incoming CO Attributes PGM Codes 165166

Selecting Incoming CO ATTR will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.2-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Incoming CO Line Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.5.2-1 Incoming CO Attribute Incoming CO Attributes define various characteristics of CO lines. Refer to Table 1.5.5.2-1.

71

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.2-1 Incoming Co Line Attributes

ATTRIBUTE CO Name ISDN Screen Indicator DESCRIPTION Incoming CO line name can be assigned. Decide to insert screen indicator to ISDN message. RANGE Max. 16 characters user-provided, not screened user-provided, verified and passed 0: Unknown 1: International 2: National 3: Subscriber 4: Not Used 0: Unknown 1: ISDN/Telephony 2: Data 3: Telex 4: National Standard 5: Private 0 : NO 1: ALL Message 2: Altering Message 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On Max. 16 digits Max. 2 digits Max. 4 digits Max. 24 digits Max. 24 digits Max. 24 digits 19, empty = not assign 180, empty = not assign 4 empty None DEFAULT user-povide d, not screened

Calling Type

For Incoming calls on the ISDN Line, this parameter defines the Type of Number Plan provided in Connected Party Information Element of the ISDN call CONNECT message. Select Connected numbering plan type of ISDN CONNECT message. That type is included in the ISDN CONNECT Message when sending the called number.

National

Calling Numbering Type

Unknown

Sending Progress Indicator

If this feature is set to ALL, Progress Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN about All Message. If this feature is set to ALERTING, Progress Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN about Alerting Message. If this feature is set to ON to R2 line, system request ANI digits (CLI data) to the calling party. If this feature is set to ON, incoming call is routed according to ICLID table (PGM 262). If this feature is set to ON, Own code is assign before original callers CLI is sent when there is transit call. Own Code Prefix code is inserted ahead of received CLI data. International Code is inserted ahead of received CLI data according to call type. If Transit CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1, Transit CLI 1 is sent. If Transit CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 2, Transit CLI 2 is sent. If Transit CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 3, Transit CLI 3 is sent. CLI Conversion table index If Ring mode is holiday and this is assigned, an incoming call is routed to the destination of holiday alternative ring index.

NO

R2 ANI Service Request ICLID Service Own Code Add to Transit CLI Own code CLI Prefix Code International Code Transit CLI 1 Transit CLI 2 Transit CLI 3 CLI Conversion Table Index Alternative Ring Table Index for Holiday

OFF OFF OFF

72

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.2-1 Incoming Co Line Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Virtual Subscriber Usage DESCRIPTION According to this value, virtual subscriber service is decided to apply or not. And how to apply virtual subscriber service. RANGE 0: NO, Normal Service 1: ALLOW 2: DENY 3: MATCH 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 0015 (sec) DEFAULT NO

Set Anonymous Call(CLIR) When No CLI Provide Dial Tone BLF Usage

If a incoming call has no CLI, system handles the call as if CLIR is set. If this feature is set to ON, dial tone is provided to networking CO. If this feature is set to ON, flex button LED will be flashing when CO line is programmed on the button. If this feature is set to ON, unsupervised conference timer can be extended by dial feature code after warning tone is heard. If this feature is set to ON, CO line is blocked after clear forward waiting time. If this feature is set to ON, Call processing tone is detected to disconnect LCO line. If this feature is set to ON, system sends answer when call is waited. If this feature is set to ON, any station can answer a call on the CO Line by dialing the Universal Answer feature code. If CO release signaling is not completed successfully, CO line is disconnected when this timer expires. When there is a conference call without supervisor, or a CO-to-CO call, the call is disconnected after this timer expires; a warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected. Clear Forward Waiting Time. Max. Ring Time when incoming CO is transferred/recalled. DISA CO call will be answered after this time. VMIB Announcement will be played after this time. The time table index to be applied to incoming CO Call. For Incoming calls on the ISDN Line, this parameter defines the delay time between Alerting and Connect Message.

Disable

OFF ON

Unsupervised Conference Extend Block after Clear Forward Waiting Time CPT Detect Answer to waiting call Universal Answer

DISABLE

OFF OFF OFF OFF

Release Guard Time

Unsupervised Conference Timer

000255 (min)

10

Clear Forward Waiting Timer Max. Ring Time DISA Supervision Timer VMIB Play Delay Timer Incoming Time Table Index CO Delay Answer Timer

1300 (sec) 15300 (sec) 19 (sec) 09 (sec) 19, none 0100 (100 msec)

300 120 2 0 none 0

73

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.2-1 Incoming Co Line Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Offnet Call Forward Usage DESCRIPTION ISDN lines can be set to use Call Deflection/Call Rerouting service if PSTN supports these feature RANGE 0: Join 1: ISDN Call Deflection 2: ISDN Call Rerouting 1-9 DEFAULT Join

R2 Signal Mapping Group

For R2 line, there is R2 signal group mapping table (PGM 268). This parameter defines the R2 signal group mapping tables index number for backward signal. If R2 incoming call is routed to another CO, this parameter defines the transit outgoing call of R2 incoming calls R2 category. For Incoming calls on the R2 line, this parameter defines the line status when an incoming destination is idle and sends ring back tone. Its for only Brazil R2, it blocks for collect call if double answer or with indication is selected. If it is set to Double Answer for collect call blocking, this timer is sending dummy answer signal. If it is set to Double Answer for collect call blocking, this timer is sending dummy idle signal.

R2 Category

1-15

R2 Line Status

1-15

Collect Call Blocking

0: Disabled 1: Double Answer 2: With Indication 1-250 (100ms)

Disabled

Collect Call Answer Timer Collect Call Idle Timer

10

1-250 (100ms)

20

74

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.3 CO Ring Assignment PGM Code 167

Selecting CO Ring Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.3-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO Ring Assignment data.

Figure 1.5.5.3-1 CO Ring Assignment Each CO line is assigned to a station or feature code for an incoming call (Ring). Separate ring assignments are made for Day, Night, and Timed Ring modes. Ring signals can be on an immediate or delayed basis allowing other stations to be assigned ringing and answer prior to a delayed station. Delay can be set from 0 to 27seconds. NOTE If the DISA Tone Service feature code is assigned, DISA service is activated line.

75

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.3-1 CO Ring Assignment

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Service Type DESCRIPTION The service type can be set. Ring Assign : ring option is applied to ring assigned stations. Feature : feature is activated to an incoming call. To change stations ring assign status, enter desired station range (Max. 30 stations can be assigned). Enter delay value; if delay is 0, station will start to ring immediately. If delay value is deleted, the station will not ring. Otherwise if delay is 19, the station will start to ring after delay time (3 times delay value). Assigned station and delay value can be displayed. If Service type is set to Feature code, it can be delayed. If Service type is set to Feature and valid feature is assigned, then assigned feature is activated when there is an incoming call The following feature can be assigned, 1) Station Group 2) ACD Group 3) Announcement Table 4) Announcement Table And Drop 5) DISA Tone 6) Direct VM transfer 7) Networking Number 8) Company Directory 9) Digits: Other digits. If user changes above feature codes from 1) to 9) to other codes, these will be displayed with this Digits type. 0-30 0 RANGE 0: Ring Assign 1: Feature DEFAULT Ring Assign

Station Range : Range Station Range : Delay

Start Station & End Station 09

STA100 (Port 0): delay 0 Others: not assigned

Station Delay Value [Station Delay] Feature Delay counter Feature

76

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.4 Incoming CO Normal/DISA Attributes PGM Code 168

Selecting Normal/DISA CO ATTR will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.4-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO Line Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.5.4-1 Incoming CO Normal/DISA Attributes If the CO line is set to Normal type, it can have normal CO Attributes including DISA service option. Table 1.5.5.4-1 INCOMING CO Line/DISA Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY CO Access from DISA DISA Account Code DISA Retry Count DESCRIPTION If this feature is set to ON, CO-to-CO call can be allowed from DISA line. When making CO-to-CO call from DISA line, password can be requested. When DISA call fails to route to the desired destination, the call can be retried as many times as the Retry Count. If the CO is not answered in Preset Forward Time, it will be routed to the assigned ring table. Preset Forward ring table index can be assigned (refer to PGM 181). RANGE 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 09 DEFAULT OFF OFF 3

Preset Forward Time Preset Forward Ring Table Index

020 (sec) 0180

77

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.5 CO Incoming Alternate Destination PGM Code 169

Selecting Incoming CO Alternative will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.5-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO Line Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.5.5-1 CO Incoming Alternate Destination When a DID or DISA call is routed to an unavailable destination (busy, DND, not available number etc.), the call can be rerouted to alternate destination. The destination is separately defined for Day/ Night/ Timed mode according to several conditions (busy, no answer, number of errors, transfer no answer, recall no answer, DND, etc) as described. If Prompt usage is set to ON, the relevant tone will be played first and then the call will be routed to alternate destination.

78

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.5-1 Incoming CO Alternate Destination

ATTRIBUTE Busy DESCRIPTION A call can be routed to busy destination when a called party or channel is busy(ex, VMIB). RANGE Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Ring Transfer Station Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Ring Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group DEFAULT

No-Answer

A call can be routed to no-answer destination when a called party does not answer the call.

Vacant Number

A call can be routed to vacant number destination when a called party number is invalid format or unallocated number.

Transfer No-Answer

A call can be routed to transfer no-answer destination when a transferred to station does not answer the call.

Recall No-Answer

A call can be routed to recall no-answer destination when a station does not answer recall ring.

DND

A call can be routed to DND destination when a called part is DND status.

Out Of Service

A call can be routed to Out Of Service destination when a called part is Out Of Service status.

Error

A call can be routed to Error destination when a called part is other error case.

79

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.5-2 Prompt

ATTRIBUTE Prompt Prompt No ([PGM 290]) DESCRIPTION If set ON, the tone is heard first before being routed to alternate destination. The relevant tone index in tone table ([PGM 290]) that is played when Prompt is set ON. RANGE OFF/ON DEFAULT OFF

80

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.6 CO Outgoing Attribute PGM Codes 170171

Selecting Outgoing CO ATTR will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.6-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO Line Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.5.6-1 CO Outgoing Attribute CO Outgoing Attributes define various characteristics of the CO lines under control of the system when there is an outgoing CO call. Table 1.5.5.6-1 CO OUTGOING ATTRIBUTE
ATTRIBUTE ISDN Screen Indicator DESCRIPTION Inserts screen indicator to ISDN message. RANGE 0: Off (user-provided, not screened) 1: On (user-provided, verified and passed) 0: Off 1: On 0: Unknown 1: International 2: National 3: Subscriber 4: Not Used DEFAULT OFF

Sending Caller Number Calling Type

If this is set to ON, Calling Party Number can be sent. For outgoing calls on the ISDN Line, this parameter defines the Type of Number Plan provided in Calling Party Information Element of the ISDN call SETUP message.

ON Subscribe

81

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.6-1 CO OUTGOING ATTRIBUTE

ATTRIBUTE Calling Numbering Plan Identification DESCRIPTION Select Calling number plan of ISDN SETUP message. RANGE 0: Unknown 1: ISDN/Telephony 2: Data 3: Telex 4: National 5: Private 0: Unknown 1: ISDN/Telephony 2: Data 3: Telex 4: National 5: Private 0: Speech 1: Unrestricted 2: Restricted 3: 3.1KHz Audio 4: 7KHz 5: Video 0: A-law 1: U-law DEFAULT Unknown

Called Numbering Plan Identification

Select Called number plan of ISDN SETUP message.

Unknown

Bearer Capability

Select Bearer Capability of ISDN SETUP message.

Speech

ISDN Line Type

The system will encode voice using the A-law or u-law PCM format and should be set to match the ISDN Back bone type. Decide to send Sending Complete IE to ISDN SETUP message. When no CLI is sent with a transit call, the system will initiate a CLI to CO direct transit call. If this feature is set to ON and same feature of incoming CO attribute is also set to ON, then Own code of outgoing CO line is inserted to the CLI of transit CO call. If this feature is set to ON, representative CLI is used to every outgoing call of selected CO line. When Representative CLI Usage (PGM170-F11) is set to ON, representative CLI is sent when making outgoing call regardless of other CLI attribute. CO Own code can be inserted before station number when making outgoing call CLI.

A-Law

Sending Complete IE for Information Message Make Transit CLI

0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On

OFF

OFF

Own Code Add to Transit CLI

0: Off 1: On

OFF

Representative CLI Usage

0: Off 1: On

OFF

Representative CLI

Max. 16 digits

Own code

Max. 16 digits

82

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.6-1 CO OUTGOING ATTRIBUTE

ATTRIBUTE CLI Type DESCRIPTION CLI type can be selected. If set to Long CLI, only selected long CLI data is used instead of normal CLI. RANGE 0: Normal 1: Long CLI 1 (PGM 135-F10) 2: Long CLI 2 (PGM 135-F11) 3: Long CLI 3 (PGM 135-F12) 0: Normal 1: CLI 1 (PGM 165-F8) 2: CLI 2 (PGM 165-F9) 3: CLI 3 (PGM 165-F10) 19, none 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT Normal

Transit CLI Type

Transit CLI type can be selected. If set to transit CLI, only selected transit CLI data is used instead of normal CLI. Select CLI Conversion table index. If this is set to ON, Redirection Number can be sent. If this is set to ON, Digits can be sent as Information message after system receives Call Proceeding Message. This defines the operation when system receive the Disconnect Message with Progress Indication (In-band information) Immediate : When a system receives the DISCONNECT Message, CO Line can be released immediately Wait User Release : When a system receives the DISCONNECT Message, CO line is not released till an user release the line. If this feature is set to ON, CPT (Call Processing Tone) is detected and the line can be dropped. If this feature is set to ON, Unsupervised Conf Timer can be extended by dialing feature code after warning tone is heard. If this feature is set to ON, dummy ring back tone is heard by system when CO line is seized. If this feature is set to ON, flex button LED will be flashing when CO line is programmed on the button.

Normal

CLI Conversion Table Index Send Redirection Number

none OFF

Digit Sending Mode

Off

Wait User Release for Inband

0: Immediate 1: Wait User Release

Wait user Release

CPT Detect

0: Off 1: On

ON

Unsupervised Conference Extend

0: Off 1: On

OFF

Provide Ring-Back Tone

0: Off 1: On

OFF

BLF Usage

0: Off 1: On

ON

83

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.6-1 CO OUTGOING ATTRIBUTE

ATTRIBUTE Release Guard Timer DESCRIPTION Release Guard Timer can be set. If CO release signaling is not completed successfully, CO line is disconnected when this timer expires. When there is conference call without supervisor, or there is any CO-to-CO call, the call is disconnected after this timer expires. The warning tone is heard before the line is disconnected. Max. Ring Time when outgoing CO is transferred/ recalled. The time table index to be applied to outgoing CO Call. The Analog CO Voice Connection mode can be set. Inter Digit Timer: Voice path is connected after inter digit timer. Immediate Connection: Voice path is connected when a user seizes the CO line. For R2 line, there is R2 signal group mapping table (PGM 268). This parameter defines the R2 signal group mapping tables index number for backward signal. Alternative path can be used when all CO lines assigned to a CO access code are busy. If this is set to ON, system sends DTMF signal after it detects the Dial Tone. RANGE 015 (sec) 2 DEFAULT

Unsupervised Conference Timer

0255 (min)

Max. Transfer Ring Timer

1300 (sec)

120

Outgoing Time Table Index Analog CO Voice Connection

19, none 0: Inter Digit Timer 1: Immediate connection

none Inter Digit Timer

R2 Signal Mapping Group

1-9

ARS Service

0: Off 1: On

Off

Send DTMF After Dial Tone

0: Off 1: On

Off

84

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.7 CO Outgoing Alternate Destination PGM Code 173

Selecting Outgoing CO Alternative will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.7-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO Outgoing Alternate Destination data.

Figure 1.5.5.7-1 CO Outgoing Alternate Destination When an outgoing call is routed to an abnormal destination, the call can be rerouted to an alternate destination. The destination is separately defined for Day/ Night/ Timed mode according to several conditions. (Recall no answer transfer no answer, no answer). You can set the destination to Disconnect, Attendant, CO Ring Assign, ALT Ring Table, Tone, Pilot etc. for each condition.

85

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.7-1 CO OUTGOING ALTERNATIVE DESTINATION

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Recall No-Answer DESCRIPTION A call can be routed to recall no-answer destination when a station does not answer recall ring. RANGE Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Ring Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Ring Transfer Station Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Ring DEFAULT

Transfer No-Answer

A call can be routed to transfer no-answer destination when a transferred to station does not answer the call.

No-Answer

A call can be routed to transfer no-answer destination about all case except recall/transfer no answer.

86

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.8 CO Outgoing Inter Digit Timer PGM Code 174

Selecting CO Inter-Digit Timer will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.8-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO Outgoing Inter Digit Timer data.

Figure 1.5.5.8-1 CO Outgoing Inter Digit Timer

87

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

When making an outgoing call with Inband DTMF tone, the time limit to enter digits can be adjusted. After timeout, the voice path is automatically connected. Table 1.5.5.8-1 CO OUTGOING INTER-DIGIT TIMER
ATTRIBUTE Seize Wait Time First Digit Second digit Third Digit Fourth Digit Fifth Digit More than 6th DESCRIPTION Wait time before first digit. Time limit between first digit and the next digit. Time limit between second digit and the next digit. Time limit between third digit and the next digit. Time limit between fourth digit and the next digit. Time limit between fifth digit and the next digit. Time limit between digit and the next digit after sixth digit. RANGE 005200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) DEFAULT 020 100 080 070 060 050 040

88

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.9 CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer PGM Code 175

Selecting DTMF Send Interval will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.9-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer data.

Figure 1.5.5.9-1 CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer When making an outgoing CO call, the time interval to send DTMF tones of each digit can be adjusted. Table 1.5.5.9-1 CO DTMF SENDING DELAY TIMER
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY First DTMF Delay Second DTMF Delay Third DTMF Delay Fourth DTMF Delay Fifth DTMF Delay Sixth DTMF Delay More than 7th DESCRIPTION Delay time before sending first digit. Delay time before sending next digit after sending first digit DTMF tone. Delay time before sending next digit after sending second digit DTMF tone. Delay time before sending next digit after sending third digit DTMF tone. Delay time before sending next digit after sending fourth digit DTMF tone. Delay time before sending next digit after sending fifth digit DTMF tone. Delay time before sending next digit after sending sixth digit DTMF tone. RANGE 0090 (100msec) 0090 (100msec) 0090 (100msec) 0090 (100msec) 0090 (100msec) 0090 (100msec) 0090 (100msec) DEFAUL T 05 02 02 02 02 02 02

89

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.10 CO COS Assignment PGM Code 177

Selecting CO COS Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.10-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO COS Assignment data.

Figure 1.5.5.10-1 CO COS Assignment Every CO line has its own COS and the toll of assigned COS is applied to the CO call (refer to Toll Exception Tables, PGM 250). Table 1.5.5.10-1 CO COS ASSIGNMENT
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Day COS : 0 Day COS : 0 Day COS : 0 DESCRIPTION CO COS in Day mode CO COS in Night mode CO COS in Timed mode RANGE 0015 0015 0015 DEFAULT 0 0 0

90

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.11 CO to CO Call Attributes PGM Code 179

Selecting CO-to-CO Attribute will display the CO-to-CO Call Attributes data input page, Figure 1.5.5.11-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO-to-CO Call Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.5.11-1 CO to CO Attributes CO to CO Call Attribute options can be set separately for each CO group (Incoming CO group to Outgoing CO group, Outgoing CO group to Outgoing CO group).

91

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.11-1 CO TO CO ATTRIBUTE

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Station Outgoing Call Transfer (Outgoing - Outgoing : Station) Attendant Outgoing Call Transfer (Outgoing - Outgoing : Attendant) Outgoing Call Transfer Release Type (Outgoing - Outgoing : Release Type) Outgoing Call Transfer Release Time (Outgoing - Outgoing : Release Time) DESCRIPTION While stations are connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group, the station can transfer the call to second CO group. While ATD is connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group, the ATD can transfer the call to second CO group. If outgoing CO call can be transferred to other CO call, release type can be set. RANGE 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT ON

ON

0: None 1: Release after Release Timer 000300 (sec)

None

If an outgoing CO call is transferred to CO call and CO-to-CO call is started, the call is disconnected after release time, when release type is set to Rls after Rls Time; before disconnecting, warning tone is provided. If this feature is set to ON, CO incoming call can be transferred directly without any stations or ATD to transfer the call. While stations are connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group, the station can transfer the call to second CO group. While ATD is connected to incoming CO call of first CO Group, the ATD can transfer the call to second CO group. If incoming CO call can be transferred to other CO call, release type can be set.

060

Incoming Call Transfer Directly (Incoming - Outgoing : Direct) Station Incoming Call Transfer (Incoming - Outgoing : Station) Attendant Incoming Call Transfer (Incoming - Outgoing : Attendant) Incoming Call Transfer Release Type (Incoming - Outgoing : Release Type) Incoming Call Transfer Release Time (Incoming - Outgoing : Release Time)

0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On

OFF

ON

ON

0: None 1: Release after Release Timer 000300 (sec)

None

If an incoming CO call is transferred to CO call and CO-to-CO call is started, the call is disconnected after release time, when release type is set to Rls after Rls Time; before disconnecting, a warning tone is provided.

060

92

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.12 CO Group Access Code Attribute PGM Code 180

Selecting CO Group Access Code will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.12-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO Group Access code Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.5.12-1 CO Group Access Code Attribute Each CO Group Access Code has different attributes so the same CO group can be accessed using different codes and options.

93

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.12-1 CO GROUP ACCESS CODE ATTRIBUTE

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Access Code Name DESCRIPTION When CO Grp Access code is dialed or flex. Button of this code is pressed; name is displayed on the station LCD. Select a CO line priority to seize. RANGE Max. 16 characters 0: Round Robin 1: Last Line 2: First Line 0172 (MG-300) 0124 (MG-100) DEFAULT

CO Line Choice

Round Robin

Outgoing Group No

Decide CO Group number to seize. NOTE If not assigned, the access code is used as [LOOP] button.

Not assigned to the first access code. 0172 (MG-300) 0124 (MG-100) is assigned sequentially from the second access code.

AND Digit

Automatic Network Dialing (AND) digit is sent after the CO line is seized. Establishes CO calls by dialing CO Group Access Code only. If Emergency Force Service is set and all co line is busy, a CO line can be disconnected and emergency call can be served. If Alternate Route Selection (ARS) is set, ARS digit is dialed instead of CO Group Access code when there is no available path CO line. Alternate CO Group Access code to be used when original CO Group Access code failed to find available CO line. When alternate CO Group Access code is used, this field defines if original digits or converted digits are used. Second alternate CO Group Access code to be used when original CO Group Access code and first ARS code failed to find available CO line. When alternate CO Group Access code is used, this field defines if original digits or converted digits are used.

Max. 10 digits

Emergency Force Service

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

ARS Service

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

ARS Digit1

Max. 8 digits

ARS Digit 1 Usage

Converted Digits Original Digits Max. 8 digits

Converted Digits

ARS Digit2

ARS Digit 2 Usage

Converted Digits Original Digits

Converted Digits

94

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.5.13 Alternate Ring Assignment PGM Code 181

Selecting Alternative Ring Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.13-1. 1. Enter a valid Table index. 2. Click [Load] to enter the Alternate Ring Assignment data.

Figure 1.5.5.13-1 Alternate Ring Assignment There is a supplementary ring assignment table, which is used for alternative destination or ICLID destination, CO Preset Call Forward, Holiday Ring Table, etc. The destination can be stations (no delay value) or any feature code. Table 1.5.5.13-1 ALTERNATIVE CO RING TABLE ATTRIBUTE
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Service Type DESCRIPTION If service type is set as Ring Assign, ring option is applied to ring assigned stations. Otherwise, if service type is set to Feature, feature is activated to an incoming call. Destination stations If Service type is set to Ring assign, feature code is activated after feature delay counter. 0030 00 RANGE 0: Ring Assign 1: Feature DEFAULT Ring Assign

Station Range Feature Delay counter

95

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.13-1 ALTERNATIVE CO RING TABLE ATTRIBUTE

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Feature DESCRIPTION If Service type is set to 'Feature' or Feature delay counter is set, then assigned feature is activated when there is an incoming call. The following feature can be assigned, The following feature can be assigned, 1) Station Group, 2) ACD Group 3) Announcement Table 4) Announcement table and Drop 5) DISA Tone 6) Direct VM transfer 7) networking number 8) Company Directory 9) Digits RANGE DEFAULT

1.5.5.14 CO MATM Attribute - PGM Code 182

Selecting Alternative Ring Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.5.14-1. 1. Enter a valid CO range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the CO MATM Attribute data.

Figure 1.5.5.14-1 CO MATM Attribute A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect MATM features and functions of the System. Table 1.5.5.14-1 CO MATM Attribute
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Delay Start Timer DESCRIPTION Determine the time of delay start timer. This timer only for EM type. RANGE 005200 (100msec) DEFAULT 006

96

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.5.14-1 CO MATM Attribute

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Send Wink Timer Send Answer Timer Osdn Release Timer Send Ring On Timer Send Ring Off Timer Send Ring Rptcnt Co Timer Send Ring Rptcnt Rd Timer EM Signal Mode DESCRIPTION Determine the time of send wink timer. This timer only for EM type. Determine the time of send answer timer. This timer only for EM type. Determine the time of osnd release timer. This timer only for EM type. Determine the time of send ring on timer. This timer only for CO, RD type. Determine the time of send ring off timer. This timer only for CO, RD type. Determine the time of send ring repeat count co timer. This timer only for CO, RD type. Determine the time of send ring repeat count read timer. This timer only for CO, RD type. Determine the EM signal mode 2W(0) or 4W(1). This timer only for EM type. If you change this ADMIN, need MATM reset. RANGE 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) 010200 (100msec) DEFAULT 006 006 013 020 040 008 02 2W(0)

97

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6 Station Group Data

Stations can be grouped for call routing, dialing, call pick-up, or various purposes. The following groups can be defined: Station Group: Terminal / Circular / Ring / Longest Idle / VM Pick Up Group Paging Group Command call Group PTT Group Interphone Group Pilot Hunt Group ACD Group Selecting the Station Group Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed, Figure 1.5.6-1.

Figure 1.5.6-1 System Group Data Main Page The Station Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in the following table.

98

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.1 Station Group Assignment PGM Code 200

Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls will search (hunt) for an idle station in the group. The system allows assignment of hunt processes, Terminal, Circular, Ring, Longest Idle and VM. The Station Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 1.5.6-1 STATION GROUP CAPACITY. Table 1.5.6.1-1 STATION GROUP CAPACITY ITEM CAPACITY iPECS-MG 100 iPECS-MG 300
ITEM iPECS-MG 100 Number of Groups Member in a Group 20 50 CAPACITY iPECS-MG 300 50 50

Selecting Station Group Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.1-1. Enter the desired Station Group Number and click [Load] to display the Station Group Assignment.

Figure 1.5.6.1-1 Station Group Assignment The page consists of 2 menus [Basic Attributes] & [Member Management]: [Basic Attributes] menu group type, group name, tenant number, time table index and pickup option are assigned to the Station Group. [Member Management] menu members of the Station group are managed. Adding members to the Station Group or deleting members from the Station Group is possible.

99

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

To add members to the Station Group: 1. Input the desired Station range to add. 2. Click [Add] button. To delete members from the Station Group: 1. Input the desired Station range to delete. 2. Click [Del] button or check the members to delete. 3. Click the [Delete Checked Member] button. NOTE A station can belong to multiple groups. Table 1.5.6.1-2 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Group Type DESCRIPTION Determines the type of station group. RANGE 0: Not Assign 1: Terminal 2: Circular 3: Ring 4: Longest Idle 5: Voice Mail Max. 16 characters 19 (MG-300) 15 (MG-100) DEFAULT Not Assign

Group Name Tenant Number

Determines the name of group. Assigns a tenant of station group. According to the Tenant Group Access, Stations in other groups are allowed or denied the ability to place intercom calls to this Station group. Determines the time table index of group It can be used to determine the forward destination with apply time type. Pickup Option Stations can pick-up group calls ringing at other stations in the group. According to the value, Station group can be set to Pick-Up group. Assigns stations as members of a station group.

Time Table Index

19

Pick Up Option

0: Disable 1: All Call 2: Intercom 3: External

Disable

Member

100

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.2 Station Group Attributes PGM Codes 201202

Selecting Station Group Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.2-1. Enter the desired Station Group Number and click Load to display the Station Group Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.6.2-1 Station Group Attributes Each type of group has a different set of available attributes relating to greeting and queuing announcements and timers. Station Group has available attributes relating to announcements, timers, forward, etc., as the following table describes. Table 1.5.6.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Greeting Tone Type DESCRIPTION Determines the type of greeting tone. When the Station Group is called, Greeting Tone is always provided. Range 1 - 14, default 1 Normal Tone RANGE 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6. VMIB MOH1 7. VMIB MOH2 8. VMIB MOH3 9. VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only) 10. SLT MOH1 11. SLT MOH2 12. SLT MOH3 13. SLT MOH4 14. SLT MOH5 DEFAULT Normal

101

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Greeting Play Timer DESCRIPTION Determines greeting play time. Greeting announcement can be played during greeting play timer. Determines greeting tone number in case greeting type is normal. Determines greeting prompt / annc number when greeting type is PROMPT/ANNC. After a Greeting announcement is played, system repeats it for this value. If value is 0, the Greeting announcement is repeated infinitely. Or, greeting announcement is stop when the Greeting Play timer is expired. Determines the pause timer before greeting repeat. This is the time for the delay between Greeting announcements. Determines the type of queuing tone. When all members are busy or set to Call Forward or in DND, Queuing Tone is provided. RANGE 000180 (seconds) 0119 001255 DEFAULT 000

Greeting Tone No Greeting Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Greeting Repeat Count

NOT ASG NOT ASG

000100

Greeting Repeat Delay Timer Queuing Tone Type

000100 (seconds) 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6. VMIB MOH1 7. VMIB MOH2 8. VMIB MOH3 9. VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only) 10. SLT MOH1 11. SLT MOH2 12. SLT MOH3 13. SLT MOH4 14. SLT MOH5 010300 (seconds) 0119

INT MOH

Queuing Forward/ Second Queuing Annc. Timer Queuing Tone No

Determines queuing forward/second annc timer. When this timer is expired, the call is forwarded according to Forward Type. Determines tone number in case queuing type is normal. The tone of Tone Frequency/Cadence (PGM 264) is provided. Determines queuing prompt / annc number when queuing type is PROMPT/ANNC. Determines queuing repeat number. After a Queuing announcement, system repeats the announcement for this value. If value is 0, the announcement is repeated infinitely. Or, announcement is stop when the Queuing timer is expired. Determines the pause timer before queuing repeat. This is the time for the delay between Queuing Announcements.

30

NOT ASG

Queuing Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Queuing Repeat Count

001255

NOT ASG

000100

Queuing Repeat Delay Timer

000100 (seconds)

102

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY CCR during First Queuing Announcement DESCRIPTION This entry defines CCR option during queuing announcement is provided. Determines CCR option during queuing announcement is provided. If Queuing Tone type is Announcement, CCR is operated according to CCR Table Index of Announcement Table(PGM 259). This entry defines MOH option during queuing annc. Pause time. 01 RANGE DEFAULT 0

MOH for Prompt/ Announcement Pause

1. OFF 2. INT MOH 3. EXT MOH 4. VMIB MOH1 5. VMIB MOH2 6. VMIB MOH3 7. VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only) 8. SLT MOH1 9. SLT MOH2 10. SLT MOH3 11. SLT MOH4 12. SLT MOH5 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6. VMIB MOH1 7. VMIB MOH2 8. VMIB MOH3 9. VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only) 10. SLT MOH1 11. SLT MOH2 12. SLT MOH3 13. SLT MOH4 14. SLT MOH5 010300 (seconds)

OFF

Second Queuing Tone Type

Determines the type of queuing tone.

INT MOH

Second Queuing Forward/Second Queuing Annc. Timer Second Queuing Tone No Second Queuing Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Second Queuing Repeat Count Second Queuing Repeat Delay Timer

Determines queuing forward/second annc timer.

30

Determines tone number in case queuing type is normal. Determines queuing prompt / annc number when queuing type is PROMPT/ANNC.

0119 001255

NOT ASG NOT ASG

Determines queuing repeat number. Determines the pause timer before queuing repeat.

000100 000100 (seconds)

3 0

103

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.2-1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Second CCR during First Queuing Announcement DESCRIPTION 01 RANGE DEFAULT 0

This entry defines CCR option during queuing announcement is provided. If Queuing Tone type is Announcement, CCR is operated according to CCR Table Index of Announcement Table(PGM 259).

Second MOH for Prompt/ Announcement Pause

This entry defines MOH option during queuing annc. Pause time.

1. OFF 2. INT MOH 3. EXT MOH 4. VMIB MOH1 5. VMIB MOH2 6. VMIB MOH3 7. VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only) 8. SLT MOH1 9. SLT MOH2 10. SLT MOH3 11. SLT MOH4 12. SLT MOH5 0. After Greeting 1. In Greeting 0099 0. NOT USED 1. UNCOND 2. Q Overflow 3. Time out 4. All

OFF

Call In Greeting Max. Queue Count Forward Type

Determines if a call is routed to destination during greeting, tone is played. Determines queue count. Determines forward type. 0. Not used 1. Unconditional: a call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2. Queuing overflow: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow. 3. Tmeout: a call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer is expired. 4. All: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired. Determines a time to apply forward type.

After Greeting 00 NOT USED

Apply Time Type

0. ALL 1. DAY 2. NIGHT 3. TIMED Max. 16 digits 000600

ALL

Forward Destination Wrap-Up Timer

Determines a forward destination (trunk access code should be included). Determines wrap up timer; a member is available when this timer is expired after a member goes to idle. Determines no answer timer; if this timer is expired, a call is routed to the next member. This entry defines ring no answer timer. If this timer is expired, a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type. This entry defines if system answer the call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided.

None 010

Member No-Answer Timer Ring No-Answer Forward Timer Provide Announcement with Answer

0560 (seconds) 0180 (seconds) 0: with answer 1: w/o answer

15 0

with answer

104

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.3 Voice Mail Group Attributes PGM Code 203

Selecting Voice Mail Group Attributes will display the page shown. Enter the Voice Mail Group number and click [Load], the Web page for the selected group will be displayed, Figure 1.5.6.3-1.

Figure 1.5.6.3-1 Voice Mail Group Attributes Voice Mail group has available attributes relating to the dialing service such as put mail, get mail, etc., as described in the following Table 1.5.6.3-1.

105

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.3-1 VOICE MAIL GROUP ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Put Mail Index DESCRIPTION For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, this contains the Put Mail dial code. For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, this contains the Get Mail dial code. For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, this contains the Busy dial code. For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the No answer dial code. For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, this contains the Disconnect dial code. This entry defines SMDI Type for external voice mail device. This entry defines SMDI CLI Information. If set to enable, the system will send SMDI with CLI. RANGE 19 DEFAULT 1

Get Mail Index

19

Busy Index

19

No-Answer Index

19

Disconnect Index

19

SMDI Type SMDI CLI Information

0. Type1 1. Type2 ON/OFF

Type1 OFF

106

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.4 Pick Up Group PGM Code 204

Selecting Pick Up Group will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.4-1. Enter the desired Pick Up Group number and click [Load] to display the group member Assignment.

Figure 1.5.6.4-1 Pick-Up Group Assignment Firstly, determine Pick-up Condition, and manage members of Pick-Up Group. How to manage members is the same as the way of Station Group Assignment (PGM 200). Table 1.5.6.4-1 PICKUP GROUP ASSIGNMENT
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Pick-Up Condition DESCRIPTION Determines pick up condition. (All/Internal/External) Assigns stations as members of a station pickup group. RANGE All Call Intercom Call External Call DEFAULT All Call

Member

The Station Pick up Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system is described in Table 1.5.6.4-2. Table 1.5.6.4-2 STATION PICK-UP GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM iPECS-MG 100 Number of Groups Member in a Group 20 100 CAPACITY iPECS-MG 300 50 100

107

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.5 Page Group PGM Code 205

Selecting Page Group Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.5-1. Enter the desired Page Group number and click [Load] to display the Group Assignment.

Figure 1.5.6.5-1 Page Group Assignment Table 1.5.6.5-1 PAGE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Member DESCRIPTION Assigns stations as members of a page group. RANGE DEFAULT

The Page Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 1.5.6.5-2. Table 1.5.6.5-2 PAGE GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM iPECS-MG 100 Number of Page Groups Member in a Group 15 50 CAPACITY iPECS-MG 300 30 50

108

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.6 Command Conference Group PGM Code 206

Selecting Command Conference Group will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.6-1. 1. Enter the desired Command Conference Group number. 2. Click [Load] to display the Group Assignment, Attributes.

Figure 1.5.6.6-1 Command Conference Group Assignment A user can make command call with {command group call (page)} feature code, {command group call (conference)} feature code. Stations and external telephone number can be arranged in groups so that a user may create a conference with all members of the group with a single call. Member assignment is only available from within Web Admin. Table 1.5.6.6-1 COMMAND CALL GROUP ASSIGNMENT
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY On-Hook Service DESCRIPTION Determines On Hook Service. On Hook: When a user goes on hook, system allows ON HOOK service. Recall: When a user goes on hook, system provides RECALL. Determines ONE WAY BUSY service. BUSY : the call for busy station can be canceled. Request Queuing : the call can be queued in busy station. Recover Call : the call can be override after the existing call is disconnected. RANGE 0. ON HOOK 1. RECALL 0. BUSY 1. REQEST QUEUING 2. RECOVER CALL DEFAULT ON HOOK

One-Way Busy

BUSY

109

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.6-1 COMMAND CALL GROUP ASSIGNMENT

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Both-Way Busy DESCRIPTION Determines BOTH WAY BUSY. BUSY : the call for busy station can be canceled. Request Queuing : the call can be queued in busy station. Recover Call: the call can be override after the existing call is disconnected. Determines member of group. Station: Station Number CO Grp: CO Grp Access code and Tel Number RANGE 0. BUSY 1. REQEST QUEUING 2. RECOVER CALL DEFAULT BUSY

Member

The Command Conference Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 1.5.6.6-2. Table 1.5.6.6-2 COMMAND CALL GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM iPECS-MG 100 Number of Groups Member in a Group 10 12 CAPACITY iPECS-MG 300 10 12

110

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.7 PTT Group PGM Code 208

Selecting PTT Group Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.7-1. Enter the desired PTT Group number and click [Load] to display the Group Assignment.

Figure 1.5.6.7-1 PTT Group Assignment Each Phone can be assigned as a member of one or more of the system Push-To-Talk groups. A member can page to PTT group by using PTT button after the member logged in. The PTT Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 1.5.6.7-2. Table 1.5.6.7-1 PTT GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Member DESCRIPTION This entry assigns stations as members of a PTT group. RANGE DEFAULT

The PTT Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 1.5.6.7-2 as below. Table 1.5.6.7-2 PTT GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM iPECS-MG 100 Number of PTT Groups Member in a Group 10 50 CAPACITY iPECS-MG 300 10 50

111

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.8 Interphone Group PGM Code 209

Selecting Interphone Group Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.8-1. Enter the desired Interphone Group number and click [Load] to display the Group Assignment.

Figure 1.5.6.8-1 Interphone Group Digit Destination

112

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

To call the stations using one digits, some stations can be gathered into an Interphone Group (refer to Table 1.5.6.8-1). Table 1.5.6.8-1 INTERPHONE GROUP DIGIT DESTINATION
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Digit 0 Service Digit 1 Service Digit 2 Service Digit 3 Service Digit 4 Service Digit 5 Service Digit 6 Service Digit 7 Service Digit 8 Service Digit 9 Service DESCRIPTION Determines the digit 0 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 1 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 2 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 3 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 4 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 5 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 6 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 7 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 8 destination of Interphone group. Determines the digit 9 destination of Interphone group. RANGE Station Number Station Number Station Number Station Number Station Number Station Number Station Number Station Number Station Number Station Number DEFAULT

The Interphone Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 1.5.6.8-2. Table 1.5.6.8-2 INTERPHONE GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM iPECS-MG 100 Number of Groups Member in a Group 10 10 CAPACITY iPECS-MG 300 10 10

113

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.9 Pilot Hunt Group PGM Codes 210211

Selecting Pilot Hunt Group Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.9-1. Enter the desired Pilot Hunt Group number and click [Load] to display the Group Assignment.

Figure 1.5.6.9-1 Pilot Hunt Group Attributes A Station can be grouped for Pilot Hunt Feature. Users may select incoming calls in the group to re-route to other stations (local or networked), station groups, the VMIB according to ring mode (Day/Night/Timed). A member of the Pilot Hunt Group may have Pilot Hunt Ring Access authority set for call coverage on another member Station in a group. Table 1.5.6.9-1 PILOT HUNT GROUP ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Service DESCRIPTION ALL call : Intercom and External call will be served for Pilot Hunt Feature. Intercom call: Only Intercom call will be served. External call: Only External call will be served. Terminal: The call will proceed to the next listed station in the group until reaching the last listed station. Circular: The call will be directed to the next station defined in the group. The call will continue to hunt until each station in the group has been tried. Time Table index RANGE 0. ALL call 1. Intercom call 2. External call 0. Terminal 1. Circular DEFAULT ALL call

Type

Circular

Time Table Index

19

114

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.9-1 PILOT HUNT GROUP ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Day Forward Type DESCRIPTION Determines call forward type during Day mode. RANGE 0. Not Use 1. Unconditional 2. Busy 3. No Answer 4. Busy/ No Answer Max. 24 digits 0. Not Use 1. Unconditional 2. Busy 3. No Answer 4. Busy/ No Answer Max. 24 digits 0. Not Use 1. Unconditional 2. Busy 3. No Answer 4. Busy/ No Answer Max. 24 digits Not Use Not Use DEFAULT Not use

Day Forward Destination Night Forward Type

Determines the forward destination during Day mode. Determines call forward type during Night.

Night Forward Destination Timed Forward Type

Determines the forward destination during Night mode. Determines the timed call forward type during Timed mode.

Timed Forward Destination Members

Determines the timed forward destination during Timed mode. Assigns stations as members of a pilot hunt group.

The Pilot Hunt Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in Table 1.5.6.9-2 as shown. Table 1.5.6.9-2 PILOT HUNT GROUP CAPACITY
ITEM iPECS-MG 100 Number of Groups Member in a Group 20 20 CAPACITY iPECS-MG 300 50 20

115

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.10 ACD Group Assignment PGM Code 212

Selecting ACD Group Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.10-1. Enter the desired ACD Group Number and click [Load] to display the ACD Group Assignment data.

Figure 1.5.6.10-1 ACD Group Attributes The ACD Group capacities for the iPECS-MG system are shown in the following table. Table 1.5.6.10-1 ACD Group Capacity
Items Number of ACD Group Number of Supervisor Number of Sub-Supervisor Number of Agents Max. Queue Count Max. Steps for Queue Announcement ACD Agent Priority iPECS-MG 100 20 1 3 50 99 5 20 (120) iPECS-MG 300 50 1 3 50 99 5 20 (120)

The page consists of 2 menus [Basic Attributes] & [Member Management]: [Basic Attributes] menu group name, service status, tenant number, time table index, auto service status change, main supervisor and sub supervisor are assigned to the ACD Group. [Member Management] menu members of the ACD group are managed. Adding members to the ACD Group or deleting members from the ACD Group is possible.

116

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

To add members to the ACD Group: 1. Input the desired Station range to add. 2. Click [Add] button. To delete members from the ACD Group: 1. Input the desired Station range to delete. 2. Click [Del] button or check the checkbox of members to be deleted. 3. Click the [Delete Checked Member] button. Table 1.5.6.10-2 ACD GROUP ASSIGNMENT
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Group Name Service Status DESCRIPTION Determines the name of group. Group Status RANGE Max. 16 characters 0: Not-Service 1: Normal 2: Forward 3: Night 4: Holiday 19 (MG-300) 15 (MG-100) 19 0: Manual Change 1: Night Auto Change 2: Holiday Auto Change 3: Night / Holiday Auto Change Not-Service DEFAULT

Tenant Number Time Table Index Auto Service Status Change

Assigns a tenant of station group. Time table index Group Status change option for Automatically change with time table or Manually by Supervisor.

1 1 Manual Change

Main Supervisor Sub Supervisor

Main Supervisor in a ACD Group 3 Sub-Supervisor in a ACD Group Sub1 Sub2 Sub3

Member

Assigns stations as members of a ACD group.

117

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.11 ACD Group Attributes PGM Codes 213214

Selecting ACD Group Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.11-1. Enter the desired ACD Group Number and click [Load] to display the ACD Group Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.6.11-1 ACD Group Attributes Table 1.5.6.11-1 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES (ACD Call Handling PGM 213)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Group Forward Destination Night Service DESCRIPTION When ACD Group status is Group Forward Status, all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination. This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Night Status. 0: Release Call 1: Announcement. 2: Forward Destination Release Call RANGE DEFAULT

Night Forward Destination

This entry defines the forward destination for night mode. When Night Service type is Forward Destination, this destination will be applied. This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Holiday Status. 0: Release Call 1: Holiday. 2: Forward Destination Release Call

Holiday Service

Holiday Forward Destination

This entry defines the forward destination for holiday mode. When Holiday Service type is Forward Destination, this destination will be applied. This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Overflow. 0: Release Call 1: Overflow. 2: Forward Destination Release Call

Overflow Service

118

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.11-1 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES (ACD Call Handling PGM 213)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Overflow Forward Destination DESCRIPTION This entry defines the forward destination for overflow service. When Overflow Service type is Forward Destination, this destination will be applied. This entry defines MAX queuing call count. If queued ACD Call count is over this count, ACD group status will be changed to Overflow Status. This entry defines queuing announcement play service step. One ACD Group can have max. 5 announcements for queuing ACD Call. This entry defines total queuing announcement repeat service count. If this entry is defines as Three Times, Queuing Announcements will be played three times from 1st to defined Step. And then from Repeat Position Queuing Announcement will be restarted from Repeat Position to defined step until Repeat Count. This entry defines Repeat Announcement Start Position. This entry defines reroute usage when all queuing announcements are over. This entry defines the forward destination when all queuing announcements are over. 0099 10 RANGE DEFAULT

MAX Queuing Count

Queuing Announcement Service Step Repeat Announcement Count

15

0: No Repeat 1: One Time 2: Three Times 3: Five Times 4: Ten Times 5: Twenty Times 15 0: Release Call 1: Forward 2: Destination 0: N/A 1: Station Number 2: Station Group 3: ACD Group 4: Digits 1. Not use 2. Forward Call to No-Answer Forward Destination 3. Agent DND State Change 4. Agent DND State Change & Forward Call

0: No Repeat

Repeat Announcement Start Position Forward Service After Queuing Forward Destination After Queuing

1 Release Call N/A

Agent No-Answer Service

This entry defines what to do when an ACD agent does not answer an ACD call. 1 Not use 2 Forward Call to No-Answer Forward Destination: call will be forwarded to defined destination. 3 Agent DND State Change: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state. 4 Agent DND State Change & Forward Call: Agent state will be changed to DND state, and ACD call will be forwarded to defined destination. When Agent No-Answer Service option is Forward Call to No-Answer Forward Destination, this destination will be applied.

Not use

No-Answer Forward Destination

1. N/A 2. Station Number 3. Station Group 4. ACD Group 5. Digits

N/A

119

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.11-2 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 214)

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Password Check When Service Mode Changed Agent-Agent Call Restriction Agent Work Mode Expired Time Agent Auto Work Mode DESCRIPTION This entry defines whether to check the supervisor password when supervisor change group status. This entry defines agent to agent call restriction. This entry defines wrap up timer of Agent Work State. This entry defines when change the agent work state. (It is applied, when only agent has auto-work option) 1 CALL: after conversation, agent state will be changed to work state. 2 CALL, RING: after conversation or after ringing, agent state will be changed to work state. 3 CALL, OG: after conversation or after make outgoing call, agent state will be changed to work state. 4 CALL, RING, OG: after conversation or after ringing or after make outgoing call, agent state will be changed to work state. This entry defines usage of Announcement when agent answer incoming ACD Call. This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call. RANGE 1: On 0: Off 0: Allow 1: Direct call 2: Forward call 001240 0: Call 1: Call, Ring 2: Call OG 3: Call, Ring. OG DEFAULT Off

Allow

60 Call

Announcement Usage when Incoming CO Call Queuing Count Display Queue Count Display Interval

1: On 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 0: Real Time 1: 10sec 2: 20sec 3: 30sec 4: 40sec 5: 50sec 6: 60sec 1: On 0: Off 0: Ready state 1: DND state 2: Work state 1: On 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 0: Headset mode 1: Handset Mode 2: Eac-Mic Mode 3: Bluetooth mode 0: Handset mode 1: Headset Mode 2: Ear-Mic Mode 3: Bluetooth mode 4: No Change

Off Off Real Time

Password Check when Agent Log-In Agent State when Agent Log-In Auto Answer Use when Agent Log-In Auto Work-Mode Use when Agent Log-In Handset Mode when Agent Log-In

This entry defines whether to check the password when agent log-in. This entry defines the default Agent State option when agent log-in. This entry defines usage of Agent Auto Answer option when agent log-in. This entry defines usage of Agent Auto Work option when agent log-in. This entry defines usage of Agent Headset option when agent log-in.

Off Ready state Off Off Headset mode

Handset Mode when Agent Log-Out

This entry defines usage of Agent Headset option when agent log-out.

Handset Mode

120

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.11-2 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES (PGM 214)

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Call Restriction when Agent Log-Out Answer Time when Incoming CO Call DESCRIPTION This entry defines restriction of Logout State Agent. This entry defines when to connect to incoming CO call after it is queued. If this value is When Queued to ACD group, incoming call is connected as soon as it is queued to ACD group. And ACD group announcement can be provided. If this value is When Agent Answers, incoming call is not connected until an agent answers the call. This entry defines usage of ACD Call Traffic Information data Print or Not. If this value is On, ACD Call Traffic data will be printed through the Call Information-Print Port in PGM 231. This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data. If this value is ON, after print Information traffic data, previous data will be deleted. RANGE 0: Not use 1: CO outgoing 2: All call 0: When Queued to ACD group 1: When Agent Answers DEFAULT Not use

When Queued to ACD group

Information Data Print Usage

1: On 0: Off

Off

Information Data Print Interval Information Data Clear After Print

001250 1: On 0: Off

001 (10sec) Off

121

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.6.12 ACD Group Announcement PGM Code 215

Selecting ACD Group Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.2-1. Enter the desired ACD Group Number and click [Load] to display the ACD Group Announcement data.

Figure 1.5.6.12-1 ACD Group Announcement There 9 types Announcements are defined. 1. 1st Queuing Announcement 2. 2nd Queuing Announcement 3. 3rd Queuing Announcement 4. 4th Queuing Announcement 5. 5th Queuing Announcement 6. Night announcement 7. Holiday announcement 8. Overflow Announcement 9. Agent Answering Announcement. Table 1.5.6.12-1 ACD GROUP Announcement (PGM 215)
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Tone Type DESCRIPTION Designates the Tone type. RANGE 01: Normal Tone 02: VMIB Prompt 03: VMIB Announcement 04: Internal MOH 05: External MOH 0609: VMIB MOH 1/2/3/4 (MG300) 1014: SLT MOH 15 1600 119 DEFAULT Normal Tone

Tone Time Tone Port

Determines the amount of time tone is provided. Tone port index of PGM 264. The cadence of tone port may be changed by using Web-Admin. The VMIB Prompt or Announcement number when tone type is VMIB Prompt or announcement.

10

Prompt / Announcement NO.

1255

122

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.12-1 ACD GROUP Announcement (PGM 215)

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Prompt / Announcement Repeat during Tone Time Prompt / Announcement Interval Time CCR Usage DESCRIPTION The VMIB Prompt or Announcement Repeat number when tone type is VMIB Prompt or announcement. The VMIB Prompt or Announcement Repeat interval when VMIB Prompt or announcement. Repeat is assigned. This option defines the usage of CCR feature during ACD group announcement RANGE 0100 DEFAULT 1

0100

1: On 0: Off

0: Off

1.5.6.13 ACD Agent State & Priority

Selecting ACD Agent State & Priority will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.6.13-1. This page displays the state and the priority of ACD agent.

Figure 1.5.6.13-1 ACD Group Agent State & priority Table 1.5.6.13-1 ACD Group Agent State & priority
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Station Number Group Number When a station belongs to an ACD group, the ACD group number will be displayed. When a station belongs to an ACD group. Its member type will be displayed. Supervisor, Sub-supervisor, Member Agent DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT

Member Type

123

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.6.13-1 ACD Group Agent State & priority

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Member State DESCRIPTION When a station belongs to an ACD group, Log in/ Log-out state will be displayed. When station is member of ACD Group, this value will be used as the priority of agent. 120 1 RANGE DEFAULT

Priority

124

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7 System Data

Selecting the System Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed, Figure 1.5.7-1

Figure 1.5.7-1 System Data

125

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.1 System Timers I to III PGM Codes 220222

Selecting System Timer will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.1-1.

Figure 1.5.7.1-1 System Timers I to III A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect various features and functions of the system. The following Tables describe the timers and any input required.

126

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.1-1 System Timers

DISPLAY CO-to-CO Transfer Timer DESCRIPTION Determines the waiting time for answer when the CO line is transferred to another CO line. If not answered within this time, the transferred CO call is routed to no-answer destination of incoming CO Alternative (PGM 169) or Outgoing CO Alternative (PGM 173). Logged-in Hot-Desk agent will be logged out after this timer automatically. Determines the time between ACNR attempts. Determines the maximum duration of a page after which the caller and Page Zone are released. Determines the time for Pause which can be used in Speed Dial or other automatically dialed digits sent to the PSTN. When the system sends a Pause to Voice Mail using In-band signals, the Pause interval is defined by this timer. Sets the minimum duration allowed for a voice mail message in the systems VMIB. Messages shorter than this period are not stored. Sets the maximum duration allowed for a voice mail message in the systems VMIB. After this timer expires, the recording will be forced to stop automatically. Determine the call-wait indication tone repeat time. Determine the camp-on indication tone repeat time. Inter-digit timer used with Customer Call Routing function. External user should dial a next digit within this timer. After this timer expires, CCR feature will be performed by analyzing input digits. Determine automatic log-out time for Web Admin. If no data packets are received within this time a password check will be initiated by the system. Determine the time of check period UCS status. Determines the amount of time the System considers an actual state change in the hookswitch and not a momentary contact bounce. Sets the maximum time an SLT user can depress the hook-switch for a Flash signal. If the hook-switch is pressed for more than this time, system will treat it as on-hook. RANGE 000300 (seconds) DEFAULT 030

HOT-DESK Logout Timer

0000 1440 (minutes) 005300 (seconds) 000300 (seconds) 19 (seconds) 19 (seconds) 19 (seconds) 000999 (seconds)

00

ACNR Pause Timer Paging Timeout Timer Pause Timer

030 15 3

Voice Mail Pause Timer

VMIB-Message Minimum Record Timer VMIB-Message Maximum Record Timer

60

Call Wait Warning Timer Camp-On Warning Timer CCR Inter-Digit Timer

0101800 (seconds) 0101800 (seconds) 0130 (seconds)

030 030 03

Web Password Guard Timer UCS Status Check Timer SLT Hook Switch Bounce Timer SLT Maximum Hook Flash Timer

001999 (minutes) 01-10 (seconds) 0125 (100 msec.) 0125 (100 msec.)

03 01

05

127

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.1-1 System Timers

DISPLAY SLT Minimum Hook Flash Timer DESCRIPTION Sets the minimum time an SLT user must depress the hook-switch for a Flash signal. If the hook-switch is pressed for more than this time and is released before SLT maximum hook flash timer, system will regard it as hook-flash. Sets the minimum 'ON' time to detect the incoming LCO ring from public exchange (PX). If the ring 'ON' signal is maintained for this time, System will detect it as an incoming LCO ring. Sets the maximum 'OFF' time to detect the release of incoming LCO ring from public exchange (PX). If the ring 'OFF' signal is maintained for this time, System will detect it as a release of incoming LCO ring. When an analog CO Line is returned to idle, the system will deny access for this time to assure the PSTN returns the CO circuitry to idle. Sets the minimum contact closure time required to activate the contact assigned as a door open contact. A phone user will receive periodic reminder tones of a message waiting at intervals based on this timer. Sets the maximum allowed time between user-dialed digits. At expiration, the user will receive an error-tone. Sets the maximum allowed time between dialed digits from the Incoming CO. No answer timer for Normal CO ring. If this timer expires, the incoming call will be served as no answer case. No answer timer for DID/DISA CO ring. If this timer expires, the incoming DID call will be served as no answer case. No answer timer for CO recall ring No answer timer for CO Forward ring No answer timer for CO Transfer ring For R2 incoming call, this R2 forward signal detect timer waits for receiving R2 forward signal. If this timer expires, R2 signaling is finished invalid. Sets the duplication digit analysis timer. It allows duplicated numbering plan. RANGE 000250 (10 msec.) DEFAULT 020

LCO Ring On Timer

19 (100 msec.) 010150 (100 msec)

LCO Ring Off Timer

060

LCO Release Guard Timer Door Open Timer

001150 (100 msec) 0599 (100 msec.) 0060 (minutes) 000300 (seconds) 0160 (seconds) 001600 (seconds) 001600 (seconds) 001600 (seconds) 001600 (seconds) 001600 (seconds) 1-254 (seconds) 00-30 (seconds)

010

20

Message Wait Alert Tone Timer Inter Digit Timer Incoming CO Inter Digit Timer Normal CO Ring No answer timer DID/DISA No answer timer CO Recall Ring No answer timer CO Forward Ring No answer timer CO Transfer Ring No answer timer R2 Forward Signal Detect Timer Duplicated Digit Analysis Timer

00 015 15 30

30

30 30 30 14

02

128

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.2 System Attributes PGM Code 223

Selecting System Attributes will display the System Attributes data entry page, Figure 1.5.7.2-1.

Figure 1.5.7.2-1 System Attributes System Attribute programs help to define settings that affect system-wide features and functions. Generally, the entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to Table 1.5.7.2-1 for a description of the Attributes, LCD displays and the data entries required.

129

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.2-1 System Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Web Admin Password Encryption Pulse Dial Break/Make Ratio Voice Mail SMDI Interface VMIB SMTP Port DESCRIPTION The Web Admin password can be encrypted for security using RC-6 block encryption A Java VM must be installed on the users PC. The break/make ratio for pulse dialing (10pps) through analog CO line. If it is set to ON, the system interfaces SMDI protocol with external Voice Mail, If OFF, system interfaces In-band message with external Voice Mail. SMTP Port for VMIB message e-mail sending. When VMIB sends an e0mail to a user with new voice messages, this IP port number is used to connect to SMTP server. The system can use ISDN Network time or NTP to synchronize time with the ISDN or data network. To disable time sync, use DISABLE. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON 0: 60/40 1: 66/33 2: 50/50 0: OFF 1: ON 0000 9999 DEFAULT OFF

1: 66/33

OFF

0025

Network Time/Date

0: DISABLE 1: ISDN CLOCK 2: NTP 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 165535 OFF 1: MON 2: TUE 3: WED 4: THU 5: FRI 6: SAT 7: SUN 8: Everyday 0023

DISABLE

CLI Print TLS for Web Web Server Port Database Auto USB download

If is set to; ON, CLI information is printed. Enables Transport Layer Security (TLS) for Web access. Web Server port number. Determines when system database downloads to USB automatically.

OFF OFF 80 OFF

Database Auto Download Hour UC Server IP Address CTI Server IP Address MODEM Associated CO Line IP Phone Registration by STA Number Analog Line BUSY Tone Detection Times Analog Line Error Tone Detection Times PSU FAN Alarm Line Fault Alarm

The time for system database download to USB automatically. UC Server IP Address. CTI Server IP Address. MODEM Associated CO Line. Determines if IP phone can be registered only by station number or not. It defines detection count for busy tone. It defines detection count for error tone. If it is set to ON, system provides alarm ring when a FAN is broken. If it is set to ON, system provides alarm ring when Line is fault.

00

0 0: OFF 1: ON 3-9 3-9 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON ON 3 4 ON ON

130

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.2-1 System Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Traffic Operation Enhanced VM Features DB Protection Option DESCRIPTION If it is set to ON, system can save and print traffic information. Enables or disables the voice mail features that need the new prompt set from S/W version 1.6 When DB is initialized, selected information is not initialized. And also, this PGM is not initialized 0.OFF: All database is initialized. 1. VM Database: the Database related to VM (VMIB) is not initialized. And VMIB does not clear physical user message. The IP address of computer in which IPCR server application is installed. This SIP extension number is assigned to IPCR server. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0:OFF 1: VM Dababase DEFAULT OFF OFF OFF

IPCR Server IP Address SIP EXT Number for IPCR

0.0.0.0 SIP extension number

131

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.3 System Authorization Code PGM Code 225

System Authorization code table consists of 2000 entries and each entry consists of 8 fields: ID, Password, Day COS, Night COS, Timed COS, Digit Conversion Table, Tenant Number, CO Access. By default, System Authorization Codes are not assigned at all NOTE There can be no duplicate ID. Selecting System Authorization Code will display the System page shown, Figure 1.5.7.3-1.

Figure 1.5.7.3-1 System Authorization Code Table 1.5.7.3-1 System Authorization Code Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY ID DESCRIPTION Defines the ID associated with the System Authorization code bin. *. This ID can be also printed for SMDR Defines the Password associated with ID. Defines Day COS associated with the System Authorization code Defines Night COS associated with the System Authorization code Defines Timed COS associated with the System Authorization code RANGE Max. 7 digits Max. 12 digits 0-15 0-15 0-15 DEFAULT None

Password Day COS Night COS Timed COS

None 0 0 0

132

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.3-1 System Authorization Code Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Digit Conversion Table DESCRIPTION Defines Digit Conversion Table Index to use after authorization success. *. This can be supported when Dial Digit Process is type 1 (PGM281-3) Defines Tenant number associated with the System Authorization code. If this is not assigned, this authorization code can be applied to all tenants. RANGE 1-9, None DEFAULT None

Tenant No

1-9, None(MG300) 1-5, None(MG100) ON/OFF

None

CO Access

Defines CO Access associated with the System Authorization code. This is set to ON, this authorization code can be used for DISA CO Access.

OFF

1.5.7.4 System Password PGM Code 226

Selecting System Password will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.4-1.

Figure 1.5.7.4-1 System Password (Basic)

133

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.5.7.4-2 System Password (Additional)

134

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Access to the system database and maintenance functions can be protected by ID(up to 16 digits) & passwords (up to 12 digits). Three basic sets of ID & password can be defined: User, Admin and Maintenance and four additional sets of ID & password can be defined: User2, User3, Admin2, Admin3. Maintenance ID & password has full and unlimited access to the database and maintenance functions of the system. User and Admin ID & password have access to database items defined in Web Admin. NOTE There are no default passwords. Table 1.5.7.4-1 Password Attributes
ATTRIBUTE User ID (2/3) & Password Admin ID (2/3) & Password Maint ID & Password DESCRIPTION Configurable database access in Web admin and cannot access Keyset admin. Configurable database access in Web Admin. Basic Admin Password can access Keyset Admin. Full and unlimited access to database and maintenance functions. RANGE ID : 16 PWD : 12 ID : 16 PWD : 12 ID : 16 PWD : 12 DEFAULT none none none

135

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.5 Alarm Attributes PGM Code 227

Selecting Alarm Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.5-1.

Figure 1.5.7.5-1 Alarm Attributes The system can monitor an external contact. This contact is most often employed as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell. The Alarm attributes define the operation of the external contact. The Alarm Signal sent to assigned stations can be repeating or a single burst, the former is often desired. For the Doorbell, a single tone is sent each time the contact activates. Table 1.5.7.5-1 a description of the features, the data entries required and LCD displays for each attribute. Table 1.5.7.5-1 Alarm Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Alarm Enable Alarm Contact Type Alarm Mode DESCRIPTION Enables the external contact monitoring circuitry. Establishes the contact state that will activate the Alarm, close or open. The contact can be treated to function as a doorbell instead of an alarm. The assigned stations will receive an alarm tone Repeating signal or single burst (Once). RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Open 1: Close 0: Door-Bell 1: Alarm 0: Once 1: Repeat DEFAULT OFF Open Alarm

Alarm Signal Mode

Repeat

136

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.6 External Control Contacts PGM Code 228

Selecting External Control Contacts will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.6-1.

Figure 1.5.7.6-1 External Control Contacts The MPB includes 1 contact, which can be used to control external devices. Contact is assigned to activate under one of several conditions. As a Loud Bell Contact (LBC), the contact will activate when the assigned station receives an external call. NOTE For LBC, when the system is in the Night or Timed Ring mode, the contact will activate for incoming UA calls and will ignore any station assignment. The contact may alternatively activate as a Door Lock Release contact, when the External Page Zone is accessed.

137

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.7 Music Sources PGM Code 229

Selecting Music Sources will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.7-1.

Figure 1.5.7.7-1 Music Sources Music inputs are provided for use as the Background Music and/or Music-On-Hold source inputs. iPECS-MG MPB provides one (1) music input. Additionally, a VMIB announcement may be recorded and played as MOH, and the SLT port on SLIB is used as MOH.

138

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.7-1 Music Attributes

DISPLAY ICM Box Music Type DESCRIPTION Assigns the music source for ICM BOX. RANGE 00: NO BGM 01: Internal Music 02: External Music 03: VMIB BGM 1 04: VMIB BGM 2 05: VMIB BGM 3 06: VMIB BGM 4 07: SLT MOH 1 08: SLT MOH 2 09: SLT MOH 3 10: SLT MOH 4 11: SLT MOH 5 00: Romance 01: Turkish March 02: Green Sleeves 03: Fur Elise 04: Carmen 05: Waltz 06: Pavane 07: Sichiliano 08: Sonata 09: Spring 10: Campanella 11: Badinerie 12: Blue Danube 0170 DEFAULT NO BGM

Internal Music Type

Assigns the music for internal MOH.

VMIB MOH/BGM Type

Assigns system announcement to be used for VMIB MOH X. Assigns the SLT port for SLT MOH.

SLT MOH Type

139

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.8 RS-232 Port Settings PGM Code 230

Selecting RS-232 Port Settings will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.8-1.

Figure 1.5.7.8-1 RS-232 Port Settings The system has one RS-232 serial port located on the MPB. Certain port characteristics are programmable, such as the baud rate, RS-232 control, and page settings. Refer to the following Table for a description of the settings and, the data entries required. Table 1.5.7.8-1 RS-232 Port Attributes
DISPLAY Baudrate DESCRIPTION Establishes the BAUD rate for the RS-232 serial port. RANGE 1: 9600 2: 19200 3: 38400 4: 57600 5: 115200 0: OFF 1: ON 001199 DEFAULT 115200

Page Break Line Per Page

System can send this command over the serial port at the end of each page. This entry is used to set the page length. The system will send the number of lines before sending the page break. Enables XON/XOFF protocol.

OFF 66

XON/XOFF

0: XOFF 1: XON

XOFF

140

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.9 Serial Port Function Selections PGM Code 231

Selecting Serial Port Function Selection will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.9-1.

Figure 1.5.7.9-1 Serial Port Function Selections The system has one RS 232 serial port located on the MPB. MODU (Modem Unit) can be installed on MPB as an optional board. Also, the system can employ IP over 5 TCP channels for the output of various system information. Each output function is assigned a Serial port, MODU or TCP channel that is used to output the information. In Addition, a TCP port must be assigned when a function is defined to use a TCP channel. NOTE Each function can be defined to use only one output. Refer to the following Table for a description of the selections, and the data entries required. Table 1.5.7.9-1 Serial Port Function Attributes
DISPLAY On-line SMDR Print DESCRIPTION Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the On-line SMDR. RANGE 0: COM 1: MODU 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 0: COM 1: MODU 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 DEFAULT COM

Off-line SMDR/Statistics Print

Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for Off-line SMDR.

COM

141

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.9-1 Serial Port Function Attributes

DISPLAY SMDI Print DESCRIPTION Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the SMDI output. RANGE 0: COM 1: MODU 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 0: COM 1: MODU 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 0: COM 1: MODU 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 0: COM 1: MODU 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 0: COM 1: MODU 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 DEFAULT COM 1

Call Information Print

Defines the serial port or TCP channel used to receive Call Information output.

COM

Traffic Print

Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the TRAFFIC report output.

COM

Trace Print

Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the Trace output.

COM

ADMIN Data Print

Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the ADMIN Report output.

COM

142

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.10 SMDR Attributes PGM Code 232, 238

Selecting SMDR Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.10-1.

Figure 1.5.7.10-1 SMDR Attributes Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) is an ASCII output of details on both incoming and outgoing calls. Various SMDR attributes can be assigned including: output records for all calls, or long distance (LD) only, call cost per pulse when using call metering, etc. Refer to the following Table for a description of each Attribute, LCD displays and the data entries required.

143

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.10-1 SMDR Attributes

DISPLAY SMDR DESCRIPTION On-Line service enables SMDR information to be printed out in real time. Off-Line service enables SMDR information to be recorded automatically and attendant or administrator can print out or delete it. SMDR Interface service can deliver SMDR information to external application. E-Mail service deliver SMDR information using e-mail at certain times. Combination of several services can be used. RANGE 0: Not Use 1: On-Line 2: Off-Line 3: On-Line/ Off-Line 4: SMDR-Interface 5: SMDR E-Mail 6: Off-Line & E-Mail 7: On/Off-Line & E-Mail 8: Interface & E-Mail 0: OFF 1: ON DEFAULT Not Use

Outgoing Call Report

Outgoing Call Report Option for SMDR Service. If this option is set, outgoing call will be included at SMDR data Incoming Call Report Option for SMDR Service. If this option is set, incoming call will be included at SMDR data Internal Call Report Option for SMDR Service. If this option is set, internal call will be included at SMDR data Outgoing or Incoming Lost Call Report Option for SMDR Service. If this option is set, CO lost call will be included at SMDR data Determines whether to record all outgoing calls or only Long Distance calls. Long distance calls can be identified by the Outgoing Call Long Distance digit count or Long Call Prefix Code. Dialed numbers, which exceed the assigned LD digit count, are considered as long distance calls for SMDR. For security purposes, digits dialed for an outgoing call can be hidden and replaced with *. This field defines the number of digits to hide. Below Hidden Digit Position. Below defines whether leading or trailing digits are hidden. In addition, the station must be assigned for SMDR HIDE (PGM 131-FLEX7). When SMDR DIALED DIGIT HIDDEN is enabled, this field determines if leading or trailing digits are hidden.

OFF

Incoming Call Report

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Internal Call Report Outgoing / Incoming Lost Call Report Outgoing Call Record Type

0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

OFF

1: Long Distance Call 0: ALL CALL

ALL CALL

Outgoing Call Long Distance Digit Counter Hidden Digit Count

07-15

07

0~9

Hidden Digit Position

0: Left 1: Right

Right

144

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.10-1 SMDR Attributes

DISPLAY Station Transfer Charge Rate DESCRIPTION Determines where call is charged in the event of a transferred call. 1. Individual Charging: charged to both stations respectively. 2. Transferring Charging: charged to the transferring station. 3. Transferred Charging: charged to the transferred station. Determines where call is charged in the event of Attendant placing a call and transferring the call. 1. Individual Charging: charged to both stations respectively. 2. ATD Charging: charged to the Attendant. 3. Transferred Charging: charged to the transferred station. If this option set ON, second information is printed with call start time in SDMR. (MM/DD/YY HH/MM/SS) For incoming calls, the system will send the defined data item for Dialed Number field. The data item may be CLI, Dialed Number and with Ring Service Time. Note the User dialed number is always provided for an outgoing call. 1. CLI: If there are Incoming call CLI, always CLI will be printed. 2. Dialed Number: Dialed digit from external user will be printed. 3. CLI & Ring: CLI data and ringing time will be printed. 4. Dialed Number & Ring: Dialed digit from external user and ringing time will be printed. For incoming calls, additional dialed field is supported. The data item may be CLI, Dialed Number and with Ring Service Time. Note the User dialed number is always provided for an outgoing call. 1. NOT-USE 2. CLI: If there are Incoming call CLI, always CLI will be printed. 3. Dialed Number: Dialed digit from external user will be printed. 4. CLI & RING: CLI data and ringing time will be printed. 5. Dialed Number & RING: Dialed digit from external user and ringing time will be printed. Date mode print type option in SMDR data. When user make outgoing call with authorization, authorization DN number can be printed as calling-station in SMDR data. RANGE 0: Individual Charging 1: Transferring Charging 2: Transferred Charging DEFAULT Individual Charging

Attendant Transfer Charge Rate

0: Individual Charging 1: ATD Charging 2: Transferred Charging

Individual Charging

Second Information in Start Time Incoming Call Dialed Number Print Option

0: OFF 1: ON 0: CLI 1: DIALED NUM 2: CLI & RING 3: DIALED NUM & RING

ON

CLI

Incoming Call 2nd Dialed Field Print Option

0: Not-Use 1: CLI 2: DIALED NUM 3: CLI & RING 4: DIALED NUM & RING

Not-Use

Date Mode Print Option Auto. Number Print as Calling Station

1: MMDDYY 0: DDMMYY 0: OFF 1: ON

MMDDYY OFF

145

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.10-1 SMDR Attributes

DISPLAY Additional Information Filed Print DESCRIPTION Additional information can be printed in SMDR data Information: 1. Authorization DN number 2. Physical Station number 3. Transfer Station number 4. Networking related number The unit of currency used for call cost can be identified with 3 alpha characters for easy reference. When metering is provided by the PSTN, the cost per metering pulse can be assigned. Determines the position of the decimal in the Cost per Pulse, starting from the right-most digit. If CO line Metering Type is Time and incoming cal is set as report, this metering cost will be applied in every minute. If CO line Metering Type is Time and outgoing call is normal-outgoing, this metering cost will be applied in every minute. Normal-Outgoing call is not Local/Long/ International call and not Mobile call. If CO line Metering Type is Time and outgoing call is local call, this metering cost will be applied in every minute. If CO line Metering Type is Time and outgoing call is long call, this metering cost will be applied in every minute. If CO line Metering Type is Time and outgoing call is international call, this metering cost will be applied in every minute. If CO line Metering Type is Time and used CO line is dedicated line, this metering cost will be applied in every minute. If CO line Metering Type is Time and outgoing call is mobile call, this metering cost will be applied in every minute. If this option is enabled and SMDR service type is off-line, the system check free records space. And if free space is less than 1000, warning tone will be served as alarm to Attendant. This assigns the port to be used for SMDR Interface (LAN or SIO) It is SMDR Interface Option field data length option. Flexible Length or Fixed length type can be used for Option data. SMTP Mail Server Address RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON DEFAULT OFF

Cost Currency Unit Cost Per Metering Pulse Cost Fraction

Max 3 characters

6 digits 0~5

000000 0

Incoming Call Cost Per Minute Normal Outgoing Call Cost Per Minute

6 digits

000000

6 digits

000000

Local Call Cost Per Minute Long Call Cost Per Minute International Call Cost Per Minute Dedicated Line Call Cost Per Minute Mobile Call Cost Per Minute Attendant Warning Tone Service

6 digits

000000

6 digits

000000

6 digits

000000

6 digits

000000

6 digits

000000

0:OFF 1:ON

OFF

SMDR Interface Connection Type SMDR Interface Option Length Type SMTP Mail Server Address

0: SIO 1: LAN 0: Flexible Length 1: Fixed Length

SIO Flexible Length

146

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.10-1 SMDR Attributes

DISPLAY SMTP Mail Server Port SMDR Reported Mail Address SMDR SMTP Mail Server ID SMDR SMTP Mail Server Password SMDR SMTP Sender Address SMDR Mail Send Weekly Set SMDR Mail Send Daily Set SMDR Mail Auto Send Set SMDR Mail Auto Delete Set DESCRIPTION SMTP Mail Server Port Reported SMDR User Mail Address. SMTP Mail Server User ID SMTP Mail Server User Password Sender Address of Reported SMDR E-Mail Select SMDR Mail Send Day. Sets time-of-day for SMDR data to be sent on a daily basis (00 for no daily records, 01-23 for hour of the day). If the SMDR buffer is full, the system can automatically send a notification by e-mail. Deletes SMDR records after sending e-mail. Max 64 Characters N/A (Monday ~ Sunday) 00-23 N/A 00 Max 64 Characters RANGE DEFAULT

0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON

OFF OFF

147

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.11 System Date, Time PGM Code 233

Selecting System Date, Time will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.11-1.

Figure 1.5.7.11-1 System Date, Time The System Date, Time and NTP Attributes are established by this entry. The date and time are employed for several features and functions: LCR, LCD displays, SMDR outputs, Auto Ring Mode Selection, Wake-Up Alarm, etc. Network Time Protocol (NTP) can be employed to synchronize the system time with an NTP time server. The system requests the time from the NTP server at 10-minute intervals and then determines the time differential. If the system time is more 2 seconds, off the NTP time, the system time is adjusted to synchronize with the NTP server time. Table 1.5.7.11-1 System Date, Time Attributes
DISPLAY Network Time/Date DESCRIPTION The system can use ISDN Network time or NTP to synchronize time with the ISDN or data network. To disable time sync, use DISABLE. When the system time synchronize with NTP server, this address is used for NTP server firstly. When the System time synchronize with NTP server and primary NTP server is not available, this address is used for NTP server secondly. RANGE Disable ISDN Clock NTP DEFAULT Disable

NTP Primary Server Address NTP Secondary Server Address Standard Time Zone System Time System Date DST (Daylight Savings Time) Mode

Sets the system time. Sets the system date. Enables DST feature for System Time.

HH:MM MMDDYY 0: OFF 1: ON OFF

148

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.11-1 System Date, Time Attributes

DISPLAY DST Start Time DESCRIPTION Set daylight saving start time RANGE Refer to DST Table DEFAULT 2nd Sunday of March at 2:00 AM 1st Sunday in Nov., at 2:00 AM

DST End Time

Set daylight saving end time

Refer to DST Table

System Date

Sets the system date.

MMDDYY

149

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.12 Button LED Flash Rate PGM Code 234

Selecting the Button LED Flash Rate will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.12-1.

Figure 1.5.7.12-1 Button LED Flash Rate The LED Color and Flash Rate for various functions and states can be assigned. The various functions and states are shown in the following Table. The 3 colors available in the system are shown in the [COLOR] table and the 15 flash signals available in the system are shown in the [FLASH RATE] table.

150

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.12-1 Button LED Flash Rate / Color Table

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY [CALL BK] INTERCOM [CALL BK] CO LINE [CALL BK] MSG WAIT [MUTE] Mute [MUTE] COS CHANGE [DND] DND [DND] ONE-TIME [DND] PRESELECT MSG [CALL BK] ACNR [SPK] SPEAKER [SPK] HEADSET [SPK] INCOMING CALL [HOLD] Paged [HOLD] VOICE OVER [HOLD] ICM Hold [RING] ICM RING [RING] CO RING [RING] MSW WAIT [HEADSET] HEADSET [HEADSET] BLUETOOTH [DN] I USE [DN] OTHER USE [DN] DND [DN] INCOMING CALL DESCRIPTION [CALL BK] button LED status on intercom call back. [CALL BK] button LED status on CO queuing. [CALL BK] button LED status when message is left. [MUTE] button LED status when voice is muted. [MUTE] button LED status when COS is downed. [DND] button LED status in DND. [DND] button LED status in one time DND. [DND] button LED status when station assigns preselected message. [CALL BK] button LED status when makes ACNR. [SPEAKER] button LED status in conversation through speaker. [SPEAKER] button LED status in conversation through headset. [SPEAKER] button LED status when receiving intercom call. [HOLD] button LED status in paging. [HOLD] button LED status in voice-over mode. [HOLD] button LED status when call is in intercom held state [RING] LED status when receiving intercom call. [RING] LED status when receiving CO incoming call. [RING] LED status when message is left. [HEADSET] LED status when headset is used (LIP-8000 Phone). [HEADSET] LED status when Bluetooth is used (LIP-8000 Phone). [DN] button LED status when I use. [DN] button LED status when other station use. [DN] button LED status in DND. [DN] button LED status when receiving intercom call. DEFAULT (COLOR) RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED AMBER AMBER RED RED RED RED RED GREEN RED RED GREEN DEFAULT (FLASH RATE) Flash 30 IPM Flash 120 IPM Flash 120 IPM Flash Steady Flash 120 IPM Flash Steady Flash 60 IPM Flash 15 IPM Flash 480 IPM Flash Steady Flash Steady Flash 60 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash Steady Flash 60 IPM Flash Steady Flash Steady Flash Off Flash 60 IPM

151

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.12-1 Button LED Flash Rate / Color Table

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY [DN] HOLD [DN] CALL FORWARD [DN] I CONFERENCE [DN] OTHER CONFERENCE [DN] CONF SUPERVISOR [DSS] INCOMING CALL [DSS] BUSY [DSS] DND [DSS] CALL FORWARD [DSS] HANDSET-LIFT [DSS] PRESELECTED MSG [DSS] HOLD [CO] Busy [CO] OhterTalk [DN] VM Message Wait [DSS] VM Message Wait [CO] Command Group Ring [CO] Command Group Talk [CO] I Talk [CO] Hold [CO] I HOLD [CO] Recall [DSS] emergency Alert [DSS]Hotel VIP Wake Up DESCRIPTION [DN] button LED status in held. [DN] button LED status when Call forward is set. [DN] button LED status when I in conference. [DN] button LED status when another station is in conference. [DN] button LED status in conference supervisor. [DSS] button LED status when receiving incoming call. [DSS] button LED status during conversation. [DSS] button LED status in DND. [DSS] button LED status when call forward is set. [DSS] button LED status when handset is lifted. [DSS] button LED status when preselected message is assigned. [DSS] button LED status on Hold. [CO] button LED status when receiving an external call. [CO] button LED status during others talk state. [DN] button LED status when VM Message Wait is left. [DSS] button LED status when VM Message Wait is left. [CO] button LED status during Command Group Ring. [CO] button LED status during Command Group Talk. [CO] button LED status during I Talk. [CO] button LED status during Hold. [CO] button LED status during I HOLD. [CO] button LED status during Recall. [DSS] button LED status when receiving emergency alert. [DSS] button LED status when hotel VIP has wake-up alarm. DEFAULT (COLOR) AMBER RED GREEN RED AMBER RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED AMBER RED RED RED GREEN RED RED RED RED RED DEFAULT (FLASH RATE) Flash 60 IPM Flash Off Flash Steady Flash Steady Flash 60 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash Steady Flash Off Flash Off Flash Off Flash Off Flash Steady Flash 60 IPM Flash Steady Flash 120 IPM Flash 120 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash Steady Flash Steady Flash 60 IPM Wink Flash 60 IPM Wink Flash 480 IPM Flutter Flash 480 IPM Flutter Flash 240 IPM Flutter

152

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.12-1 Button LED Flash Rate / Color Table

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY [CLI] CLI (Incoming) [CLI] CLI (Outgoing) DESCRIPTION [CLI] button LED status for CLI incoming call. [CLI] button LED status for CLI outgoing call [CLI] button LED status for CLI in talk status DEFAULT (COLOR) DEFAULT (FLASH RATE) Flash: Steady Color: RED Flash: 60 IPM WINK Color: RED Flash: Steady Color: RED

[CLI] CLI (Talk)

Table 1.5.7.12-2 Color Description

COLOR 1 2 3 RED GREEN AMBER DESCRIPTION

NOTE If Green/Amber color is not supported by digital phone, Red Color is applied. Table 1.5.7.12-3 Flash Rate Description
FLASH RATE 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 Flash OFF Flash Steady Flash 30 IPM Flash 60 IPM Flash 60 IPM Wink Flash 240 IPM Flash 240 IPM Flutter Flash 480 IPM Flash 480 IPM Flutter Flash 15 IPM Flash 120 IPM Flash 120 IPM Flutter Flash 30 IPM Wink Flash 480 IPM Wink Flash 480 IPM Double DESCRIPTION

153

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.13 PPP Attributes PGM Code 235

Selecting PPP Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.13-1.

Figure 1.5.7.13-1 PPP Attributes In addition to remote access via an IP network connection, the system database may be accessed remotely using an ISDN connection. Placing a call over an ISDN Line to the designated PPP Station will provide a connection to the system database. The system will request a user id and password, which must match one of the User Ids and passwords assigned. After the matching id and password are entered, the iPECS-MG Home page is provided and Web Admin is accessed. If User ID or password does not match information contained in the system, an error will be returned. Table 1.5.7.13-1 PPP Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY PPP Usage PPP Destination DESCRIPTION Determines if PPP is enabled or disabled. If the incoming capability is 64 Kbps unrestricted digital and the called party number matches the PPP destination number, the system will automatically answer the call and request PPP ID and password. System accepts PPP ID 1. The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 1. System accepts this PPP ID 2. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON Station number DEFAULT OFF None

User ID 1 User Password 1 User ID 2

Max. 12 Character Max. 12 Character Max. 12 Character

None None None

154

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.13-1 PPP Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY User Password 2 PPP SERVER IP Address PPP CLIENT IP Address DESCRIPTION The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 2. This IP Address is used for a system as a PPP server. This IP Address is used for a system as a PPP client. RANGE Max. 12 Character IP Address IP Address DEFAULT None 10.0.0.3 10.0.0.2

155

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.14 Mobile Attributes PGM Code 236

Selecting Mobile Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.14-1.

Figure 1.5.7.14-1 Mobile Attributes The flash digit and input timer for call transferring from a mobile extension can be assigned according to the following Table. Table 1.5.7.14-1 Mobile Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Mobile Flash Digit Mobile Input Time DESCRIPTION Flash digits for accessing from a mobile extension. Inter-digit timer for entering mobile flash digits. RANGE Max. 2 digits 0120 (seconds) DEFAULT * 05

156

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.15 Intercom Busy One-Digit Attributes PGM Code 237

Selecting Intercom Busy One-Digit Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.15-1.

Figure 1.5.7.15-1 Intercom Busy One-Digit Attributes When a user calls a busy station and receives a busy tone, the user can dial just one digit and the programmed feature is performed.

157

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.15-1 Intercom Busy One-Digit Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Step Call Digit 1 Service Digit 2 Service Digit 3 Service Digit 4 Service Digit 5 Service DESCRIPTION Determines if step call is enabled or disabled. When accessing a busy tone, User may dial for one of the onetouch services. RANGE 0: Disable 1: Enable 0: N/A 1: Call-Back 2: Camp On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt 7: Override-H old 8: Override -Disconne ct DEFAULT Disable Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned

Digit 6 Service Digit 7 Service Digit 8 Service Digit 9 Service Digit 0 Service Digit * Service Digit # Service

Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Call Wait Voice-Over

158

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.16 Dummy Dial-Tone Table PGM Code 240

Selecting Dummy Dial-Tone Table Attributes will display the page, Figure 1.5.7.16-1.

Figure 1.5.7.16-1 Dummy Dial-Tone Table When digit conversion is programmed, the CO line is seized after digit conversion is completed and therefore user cannot hear the CO dial tone from PX until completing digit conversion. For this case, a dummy dial tone can be programmed. Pressing one of pre-programmed digit (0-9, *, #, X) will provide CO dial tone to the user regardless of CO line seizure.

159

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.17 Executive/Secretary Assign PGM Code 241

Selecting Executive/Secretary Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.17-1.

Figure 1.5.7.17-1 Executive/Secretary Assign Stations can be grouped as Executive/Secretary so that when the Executive enters DND, intercom and transferred calls are automatically routed to the Secretary. An Executive may have up to 3 Secretaries. A Secretary can be assigned to multiple Executives. A Secretary of one pair may be the Executive of another, however, assignments that form a loop-back are not allowed.

160

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.17-1 Executive/Secretary Assign

ATTRIBUTE Executive Secretary 13 Executive ICM Call Route (ICM Call to Exec.) DESCRIPTION Assigns Executive station. Assigns Secretary stations. 3 secretary station numbers Is available. If this option is SECRETARY, all internal calls to the Exec. Station (except for calls from executive having executive access privilege) is routed to the Secretarys station regardless of the Executives status. If SEC IF ECEC DND, internal calls are routed to secretary when executive is in DND. If this option is SECRETARY, all incoming CO calls to the Exec. Station is routed to the Secretary station regardless of the Executives status. If SEC IF EXEC DND, incoming CO calls are routed to secretary when executive is in DND. Directly routes Executive calls. If OFF, the executive call is routed to secretary. If FIRST SEC. DND, the executive gets a call when first secretary is in DND. If ALL SEC. DND, the executive gets a call when all secretaries all in DND. Determines the method of selecting a secretary station when multiple secretaries are assigned. There are two options. First Idle and Longest Idle. Determines where message wait notification is left for executive calls. If EXECUTIVE, message is left at Exec. If FIRST SEC, message is left at first secretary. 13 0: Secretary 1: SEC IF EXEC DND Not Assigned Secretary RANGE DEFAULT

CO Call To Exec.

0: Secretary 1: SEC IF EXEC DND

Secretary

Call Executive

OFF/ First Secretary. DND/ All Secretary. DND First Idle/ Longest Idle 0: Executive 1: First Secretary

OFF

Secretary Choice

First

Message Wait Station

Executive

161

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.18 Executive-Executive Access PGM Code 242

Selecting Executive-Executive Access will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.18-1.

Figure 1.5.7.18-1 Executive-Executive Access Each Executive can be allowed or denied access to other Executives. As a default, calls between Executives are disabled.

1.5.7.19 VM COS Attribute PGM Code 243

Selecting VM COS Attribute will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.19-1. Enter a valid VM COS range and click [Load] to enter VM COS Attributes data.

Figure 1.5.7.19-1 VM COS Attribute

162

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

The voice mailbox attributes for each VM COS (class of service) can be defined here. Table 1.5.7.19-1 VM COS Attribute
ATTRIBUTE Greeting Length Message Length Number of Message Retention Time DESCRIPTION The maximum length of greeting in second. The maximum length of voice message in second. The maximum number of voice message of each mailbox. The maximum number of days until the voice message is erased automatically. 0: The voice message is not deleted by system automatically. Determines if the voice message will be notified to the owner through e-mail. The Voice message can be delivered in future instead of instant deliver. (P 2.0) The receipt of voice message can be notified to the message sender. (P 2.0) The voice message can be marked as private or not. If the voice message is set private, it cannot be forward to other users. (P 2.0) RANGE 00-99 (sec) 001-999 (sec) 001-250 0-99 DEFAULT 60 60 99 0

E-Mail Notification Future Delivery Message Confirm Message Receipt Private Message Mark

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON OFF OFF OFF

163

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.20 System Reroute Table PGM Code 244

Selecting System Reroute Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.20-1. 1. Enter a valid index or an index range. 2. Click [Load] to enter the System Reroute Table data.

Figure 1.5.7.20-1 System Reroute Table A call reaches a destination after CCR announcement is played. If the destination is not valid or is wrong number or does not answer due to some reasons, the call can be routed to an alternative destination programmed in this table. According to Call-State (Busy/No-Answer/Vacant/Transfer No-Answer/Recall No-Answer/ DND/Out-of-rvice/Error), alternative destination can be assigned.

164

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Call Release, Attendant, Ring-Assignment, Alt-Ring Table and Pilot Hunt Group can be alternative destination. Table 1.5.7.20-1 System Reroute Table
ATTRIBUTE Busy DESCRIPTION User unavailable busy or channel busy (ex., VMIB). RANGE Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT ring Table Tone Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Ring Transfer Station Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Ring DEFAULT

No-Answer

No response from User Station or CO line.

Vacant Number

Intended called party is invalid format or unallocated number.

Transfer No-Answer

Call is transferred when receiving no response from User Station or CO line.

Recall No-Answer

A held call will recall in the event it is not picked up.

165

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.20-1 System Reroute Table

ATTRIBUTE DND DESCRIPTION Call is rejected at the Station RANGE Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Attendant CO Ring Assign ALT Ring Table Tone Pilot Hunt Group DEFAULT

Out of Service

Station is out of service

Error

Station is in error state.

Table 1.5.7.20-2 Prompt

ATTRIBUTE Prompt Prompt No (PGM Code 290) DESCRIPTION If set ON, the tone is heard first before being routed to alternate destination. The relevant tone index in tone table (PGM 290) that is played when Prompt is set ON. RANGE OFF/ON DEFAULT OFF

166

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.21 PPTP Attribute

Selecting PPTP Attribute will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.7.21-1.

Figure 1.5.7.21-1 PPTP Attribute If iPECS-MG system is in private network and PPTP function is set, iPECS-MG system can try to make PPTP connection to outside PC(PPTP Server). And then tunneling connection will be established between PC and iPECS-MG system. After connecting outside PC, a user is able to access iPECS-MG system even though iPECS-MG system is in private network with private IP address. Table 1.5.7.21-1 PPTP Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Server 1 PPTP Server IP Address PPTP ID PPTP Password PPTP Service CLI System accepts IP address of users PC as PPTP Server IP Address 1. System accepts PPTP ID for Server 1. The password entered is used to authorize PPTP ID 1. When a call is coming with this CLI, iPECS-MG system tries to make PPTP connection to outside PC (PPTP Server) automatically. Server 2 PPTP Server IP Address PPTP ID System accepts IP address of users PC as PPTP Server IP Address 2. System accepts PPTP ID for Server 2. IP address Max. 24 Characters Not Assigned Not Assigned IP address Max. 24 Characters Max. 24 Characters Max. 23 Digits Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned RANGE DEFAULT

167

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.7.21-1 PPTP Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY PPTP Password PPTP Service CLI DESCRIPTION The password entered is used to authorize PPTP ID 2. When a call is coming with this CLI, iPECS-MG system tries to make PPTP connection to outside PC (PPTP Server) automatically. Server 3 PPTP Server IP Address PPTP ID PPTP Password PPTP Service CLI System accepts IP address of users PC as PPTP Server IP Address 3. System accepts PPTP ID for Server 3. The password entered is used to authorize PPTP ID 3. When a call is coming with this CLI, iPECS-MG system tries to make PPTP connection to outside PC (PPTP Server) automatically. Sever 4 PPTP Server IP Address PPTP ID PPTP Password PPTP Service CLI System accepts IP address of users PC as PPTP Server IP Address 4. System accepts PPTP ID for Server 4. The password entered is used to authorize PPTP ID 4. When a call is coming with this CLI, iPECS-MG system tries to make PPTP connection to outside PC (PPTP Server) automatically. IP address Max. 24 Characters Max. 24 Characters Max. 23 Digits Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned IP address Max. 24 Characters Max. 24 Characters Max. 23 Digits Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned RANGE Max. 24 Characters Max. 23 Digits DEFAULT Not Assigned Not Assigned

168

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.7.22 Web Access Authorization

Selecting Web Access Authorization will display the Web Access Authorization data entry page, Figure 1.5.7.22-1. This page is only displayed when a password is defined.

Figure 1.5.7.22-1 Web Access Authorization Seven different accounts (ID & password) can be assigned for the access to the iPECS-MG Web administration so that the different levels of access to the program fields can be allowed. The User/User2/User3 level has access to assigned programming fields and File Upload & remote Upgrade page, which are mainly related to the system installation. The Admin/Admin2/ Admin3 level has access to assigned programming fields. The Maintenance account (ID & password) has access all the programming fields and the maintenance fields including trace settings, gateway log view, gain & cadence control, lock key install and device delete feature. In addition, the Maintenance level user can assign the authorities of the other user levels.

169

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8 Table Data

Selecting the Table Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.8-1.

Figure 1.5.8-1 Table Data Main Page

170

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.1 Toll Exception Tables PGM Code 250

Selecting Toll Table will display the Toll Table data entry page, Figure 1.5.8.1-1. Select the desired Allow or Deny Table.

Figure 1.5.8.1-1 Toll Table The COS numbers from 2 to 15 have both Allow and Deny values in the Toll Table. For each Table, there can be up to 100 separate Allow and Deny entries (up to 16 digits). Entries in the Tables can be any digit (0-9), *, #, X. Based on Table entries, stations or DISA users are allowed or denied dialing specified numbers. The following rules apply to establishing restrictions based on the Table entries: If entries are only made in the Deny Table, only those numbers entered will be restricted and all other numbers can be dialed. When there are entries in both the Allow and Deny Table pair, if the number is in the Deny Table and it is not in the Allow Table, the number will be restricted otherwise the number can be dialed without restriction. Based on Table entries, tenant groups are determined to apply the table entry or not.

171

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.2 Digit Conversion Tables PGM Codes 251252

Selecting Digit Conversion Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.2-1.

Figure 1.5.8.2-1 Digit Conversion Table The Digit Conversion Table index is assigned to the Station and CO line. In addition, digit conversion can be applied according to the Apply Time Type (Unconditional, Day/Night/Timed or LCR Time) as necessary. Each Table has 300 entries of up to 16 digits. Entries in the Tables can be any digit (0-9), *, #,X(Mask Digit). Each Index can be applied by Apply Option (All/Station/CO line/Disable). According to Display or Print Conversion Digit admin, user can see converted digit and also converted digit can be printed as SDMR data.

172

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.3 System Time Tables PGM Codes 253254

Selecting System Time Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.3-1.

Figure 1.5.8.3-1 System Time Tables The system can automatically select Ring and COS Mode based on the System Time table. Day, Night, and Timed modes are supported. Each Time Table has a ring mode related to the different ring assignments, COS and answering method for the system. The ring mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring Mode & Weekly timetable based on Time Table. Start times for Day, and Night modes, and start and end times for Timed modes are entered for each day of week. The Attendant may change the system mode selection from Automatic to Manual.

173

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.8.3-1 System Time Table Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Time Zone Comment Time Zone Daylight Saving Time Ring Mode Auto Ring Mode Weekly Table DESCRIPTION This entry defines comment of Time table. Determines the time zone to be used with the Time table. Determines Daylight saving time of Time table. This entry defines the ring mode of Time table. 0. Day, 1. Night, 2. Timed Designates Auto Ring mode for Time table. Week day DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. Workday/Holiday also can be selected. RANGE 32 Character 073 ON/OFF 02 ON/OFF 00002359 DEFAULT None 0. SYSTEM TIME OFF 0 OFF DAY: 9:00 NITE: 18:00 TDS: ..:.. TDE: ..:..

174

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.4 LCR Time Table PGM Code 255

Selecting LCR Time Table will display the LCR page shown, Figure 1.5.8.4-1.

Figure 1.5.8.4-1 LCR Time Table The LCR Time Tables provide a mechanism for defining the database with Digit Conversion Table (PGM 251252), which will route outgoing calls, particularly long distance, using the most cost-effective route. Additionally, days of the week are grouped into zones (Day Zones) and the time of day can be set into three groups (Time Zones). Table 1.5.8.4-1 provides general descriptive information and input ranges. Table 1.5.8.4-1 LCR Time Table Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Day Zone DESCRIPTION For each day of the week, a Day Zone (1 to 3) is assigned. The active Day Zone is the Zone assigned to the current day of the week. Determines the time zone 1 of day zone Determines the time zone 2 of day zone Determines the time zone 3 of day zone RANGE 13 DEFAULT Zone 1: all days of the week 0024

Time Zone1 Time Zone2 Time Zone3

0024 0024 0024

175

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.5 Holiday Time Table PGM Code 256

Selecting Holiday Time Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.5-1.

Figure 1.5.8.5-1 Holiday Time Table Each Time Table has a Holiday time table and ring mode that can be used in place of Night mode when the current date matches with Holiday time table election from automatic to manual. Table 1.5.8.5-1 Holiday Time Table
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Calendar Type Holiday Date DESCRIPTION Determines the Calendar Type for use with the Holiday time table. Designates Holiday Dates for use with the Holiday time table. RANGE LUNAR /GREGORIAN MM/DD DEFAULT GREGORIAN None

176

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.6 System Speed Table PGM Code 257

Selecting System Speed Table will display the System page shown, Figure 1.5.8.6-1.

Figure 1.5.8.6-1 System Speed Table Table 1.5.8.6-1 System Speed Dial Table Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Dial Digit Name Toll Free Tenant Number DESCRIPTION System Speed Dial Digits System Speed Dial Name Assignment to apply Toll-Free Tenant number to assign System Speed Access. If this field be leaved empty then all tenants adapt this entry. RANGE Max. 32 digits Max. 16 characters 0: OFF 1: ON 19 (MG-300) 15 (MG-100) OFF 1 DEFAULT

177

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.7 Emergency Code Table PGM Code 258

Selecting Emergency Code Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.7-1.

Figure 1.5.8.7-1 Emergency Code Table The Emergency Code Table is used to identify emergency numbers which, when dialed, will override all COS dialing restrictions. An Emergency Code number may be up to sixteen (16) digits in length. Table 1.5.8.7-1 Emergency Code Table Attributes
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Dialed Digit Changed Digit Tenant Number DESCRIPTION Dialed digits from user CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX when user dials the dialed digit. Tenant number to be applied when user dials emergency code. If this field be leaved empty, this entry will be adapted to all of tenants. RANGE Max. 16 digits Max. 16 digits Empty, 19 (MG-300) 15 (MG-100) 1 DEFAULT

178

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.8 VMIB Announcement Table PGM Code 259

Selecting VMIB Announcement Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.8-1.

Figure 1.5.8.8-1 VMIB Announcement Table The VMIB Announcement Table is used for play the VMIB Announcement. Table 1.5.8.8-1 EMERGENCY CODE TABLE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY VMIB Slot No & Announcement No CCR Multi-Language DESCRIPTION Recorded VM message from VMIB slot and Announcement number will be used. VMIB Slot (00-18) & Annc. Number (01-70) CCR Table index number to perform CCR feature during Announcement playing. Multi-language announcement table index used for playing the VMIB Announcement No. 1100 1-100, None 1 none RANGE DEFAULT

179

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.9 Customer Call Routing Table PGM Code 260

Selecting CCR Table will display the Customer page shown, Figure 1.5.8.9-1.

Figure 1.5.8.9-1 Customer Call Routing Table The system incorporates Integrated Voice Response (IVR) capabilities called Customer Call Routing (CCR). After or during a VMIB Announcement, a caller may dial a digit to select a destination or route for the call. The CCR Table defines the destination associated with digits dialed by the caller in response to a VMIB Announcement (001100). Up to 100 single-level Audio Text menus may be assigned, or multi-level menu structures (maximum 100 levels) can be established using one menu as a destination for the previous level. Table 1.5.8.9-1 CCR TABLE ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE Value DESCRIPTION The destination of CCR. The following is the CCR destination. 1) Station Number 2) Station Group 3) ACD Group 4) Announcement Table (1-100) 5) Announcement Table and Drop (1-100) 6) System Speed (2000-2999) 7) Conference Room 8) Attendant Call 9) VMIB Access 10) Networking Number 11) Internal Paging 12) External Paging 13) Internal/External All Paging 14) Company Directory (New Prompt Needed) 15) Record VM Greeting (New Prompt Needed) 16) Digits DISA can be enabled or disabled for each digit input. Table index of system alternative reroute destination (PGM 244) can be set for the case the destination does not answer. ON/OFF 001-100 ON RANGE DEFAULT N/A

DISA System Reroute Table Index

180

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.10 Authorization Code Table

Selecting Authorization Code Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.10-1.

Figure 1.5.8.10-1 Authorization Code Table When a system wants to restrict dialing some codes, the codes can be assigned in Authorization Code Table. The system compares the dialed digits to entries in Authorization Code Table, and if a match is found, the system will request the password to the caller. Only when the user dials a valid password (a associated station number and the password (PGM 131 Index 4)), the dialed code is served for the caller.

181

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.11 ICLID Route Table PGM Code 262

Selecting ICLID Route Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.11-1.

Figure 1.5.8.11-1 ICLID Routing Table The system can employ Incoming Calling Line Id (ICLID) to determine the routing of incoming external calls. Each CO/IP Line may be assigned to employ ICLID routing. The system will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Route Table, and route the call based on destination indicated by the index (bin) number of PGM 181. Table 1.5.8.11-1 ICLID Table
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY ICLID Number Name Inc CO Group Number DESCRIPTION ICLID to match for the index. ICLID name that is sent by the system to the destination for the ICLID routed call. The Incoming CO Group Number to apply ICLID routing. If not assigned, ICLID is applied to all CO Groups. Alternative Ring Index (PGM 181), for Day. Alternative Ring Index (PGM 181), for Night. Alternative Ring Index (PGM 181), for Timed. The tenant number to be applied to ICLID. The index for the ICLID exception table can be set for the exception cases RANGE 24-digits 16. Character 172 (MG-300) 124 (MG-100) 180 180 180 19 (MG-300) 15 (MG-100) 1-5 1 DEFAULT None None

Day Index Night Index Timed Index Tenant Number Exception Index

182

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.12 CLI Conversion Table PGM Code 263

Selecting the CLI Conversion Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.12-1.

Figure 1.5.8.12-1 CLI Conversion Table The system will compare a received CLI or calling CLI to the conversion table. Table 1.5.8.12-1 CLI Conversion Tables
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Original CID Converted CID DESCRIPTION Received / Original CLI. Desired to change CLI. RANGE 24-digits 24 digits DEFAULT None None

183

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.13 Tone Frequency/Cadence Table PGM Code 264

Selecting Tone Frequency/Cadence will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.13-1.

Figure 1.5.8.13-1 Tone Frequency/Cadence Table The system provides 19 different of tone ports. Each tone port may be designated a tone type according to the Tone Table (PGM 290).

184

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.8.13-1 Tone Port Table (Default)

Index Frequency FREQ 1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 425 Hz 620 1000 440 950 950 950 1400 1400 350 425 620 950 425 620 425 350 425 1260 FREQ 2 0 Hz 0 1020 0 0 0 0 0 0 440 0 0 0 0 0 620 0 0 1633 300 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF / 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 500 ms ON / 500 ms OFF 1 sec ON / 4 sec OFF 1 sec ON / 2 sec OFF 400 ms ON / 100 ms OFF 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 1200 ms ON / 320 ms OFF 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 1 sec ON 320 ms ON / 30 ms OFF 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 100 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF / 200 msec ON / 3400 msec OFF 100 ms ON / 100 ms OFF 500 ms ON / 500 ms OFF 1 sec ON 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF / 200 ms ON / 1400 ms OFF 500 ms ON / 500 ms OFF 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 3 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 2 3 1 3 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 3 2 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 1 255 (Cont.) Cadence Repeat

185

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.14 Ring Table PGM Code 265

Selecting Ring Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.14-1.

Figure 1.5.8.14-1 Ring Table Each Ring type can have 4 different ring signals from among 15 available choices. After the 4 different ring indexes are programmed, CO line or Station may select one of the 4 types.

186

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.8.14-1 Ring Table

INDEX 1 RING NAME Normal Call Ring (Station) REMARK For an internal call, this ring type and ring timer is applied. If the call is not answered within this timer, the caller gets error tone or goes to idle. For an external DID call, this ring type and ring timer is applied. If the call is not answered within this timer, the caller is routed to the NO-Answer Destination of incoming CO Alternative (PGM 169). For an internal recall, this ring type and ring timer is applied. If the call is not answered within this timer, the caller gets error tone or goes to idle. For an external recall, this ring type and ring timer is applied. If the call is not answered within this timer, the caller is routed to the NO-Answer Destination of incoming/outgoing CO Alternative (PGM 169/173). When a user activates No-Answer Forward, For an internal call, this ring type will ring for station No-Answer Forward timer (PGM 143) before the calls are forward. When a user activates No-Answer Forward, For an external call, this ring type will ring for station No-Answer Forward timer (PGM 143) before the calls are forward. Determines the amount of time a transferred internal call will ring at the receiving station before recalling the station that transferred the call. Determines the amount of time a transferred internal call will ring at the receiving station. If the call is not answered within this timer, the caller is routed to the Trans NO-Answer Destination of incoming/outgoing CO Alternative (PGM 169/173). For callback ring, this ring type and ring timer is applied. For wakeup ring, this ring type and ring timer is applied. For revertible ring, this ring type and ring timer is applied. When SLT gets paging call, this ring type and ring timer is applied. If SLT does not answer within time timer, the ring is cancelled. When station is H-mode, the internal call is connected automatically after this ring time. When station gets command conference call, this ring type and ring timer is applied. If command conference call does not answer within time timer, the ring is cancelled. When message wait is left to the station, this ring type and ring timer is applied for message wait reminder.

Normal Call Ring (CO)

Recall Ring (Station)

Recall Ring (CO)

Forward Call Ring (Station)

Forward Call Ring (CO)

Transfer Call Ring (Station)

Transfer Call Ring (CO)

9 10 11 12

Call Back Indication Ring Wakeup Indication Ring Revertible Ring Paging Call Ring

13 14

Handsfree Answer Ring Command Call Ring

15 16

Msg Alert Ring Make Call Alert Ring

187

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.8.14-1 Ring Table

INDEX 17 18 19 Alarm Ring Fault Ring DID Call Ring (CO) RING NAME REMARK For external alarm ring, this ring type and ring timer is applied. For fault ring, this ring type and ring timer is applied. For an external DID call, this ring type and ring timer is applied. If the call is not answered within this timer, the caller is routed to the NO-Answer Destination of incoming CO Alternative (PGM 169). When Emergency call is activated, Emergency Alert Ring can be defined. For bath alarm ring, this ring type is applied. (ring timer is not implemented) For VIP Wake-up ring, this ring type ring timer is applied.

20 21 22

Emergency Alrt Ring Bath Alarm Ring VIP Wake-Up Ring

1.5.8.15 Ring Frequency/Cadence Table PGM Code 266

Selecting Ring Frequency/Cadence will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.15-1.

Figure 1.5.8.15-1 Ring Frequency/Cadence Table

188

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.8.15-1 Ring Freq/Cadence Table

RING INDEX FREQUENCY FREQ 1(HZ) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 890 1260 800 1000 890 1260 800 1000 1000 1000 FREQ 2(HZ) 1020 1020 1020 1020 1020 910 1280 820 1020 910 1280 820 1020 1020 1260 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF 400 ms ON / 600 ms OFF 1 sec ON 800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF 800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF 800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF 800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF 400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF / 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF 400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF / 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF 400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF / 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF 400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF / 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 400 ms ON / 400 ms OFF 300 ms ON / 300 ms OFF 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 1 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) 255 (Cont.) CADENCE REPEAT

189

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.16 ICLID Exception Table PGM Code 267

Selecting ICLID Exception Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.16-1

Figure 1.5.8.16-1 ICLID Exception Table This table provides a way to handle some exceptional cases for ICLID (Incoming Calling Line ID) routing. If theres an entry matching the called party number, ICLID is not performed. But the called party rings for the call, which is an exception to ICLID routing. Table 1.5.8.16-1 ICLID Exception Table
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Dialed Digit DESCRIPTION Dialed digit stream activating ICLID exception. RANGE 16-digit DEFAULT None

190

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.17 R2 Signal Group Table PGM Code 268

Selecting Voice Mail Dialing Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.17-1 Selecting R2 Signal Group Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.17-1 and Figure 1.5.8.17-2. The Figure 1.5.8.17-1 is for R2 Forward Signaling table and the Figure 1.5.8.17-2 is for R2 Backward Signaling table.

Figure 1.5.8.17-1 R2 Signal Group Forward Table

Figure 1.5.8.17-2 R2 Signal Group Backward Table

191

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.8.18 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM Code 269

Selecting Voice Mail Dialing Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.18-1.

Figure 1.5.8.18-1 Voice Mail Dialing Table When an external Voice Mail system is used that employs in-band signaling, a digit sequence must be defined for the system to signal various call characteristics to the Voice Mail system. The voice mail uses the sequences to determine appropriate announcements or further call routing. The Voice Mail Dial Table permits the definition of digits as either a prefix or suffix to other digits (station number for mailbox identification). Sequences are defined for call characteristics such as Put Mail, Get Mail, No Answer Call, etc.

192

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.8.18-1 Voice Mail Dial Table

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Voice Mail 1 - Put Voice Mail 2 - Get Voice Mail 3 - Busy Voice Mail 4 - No Answer Voice Mail 5 Error Voice Mail 6 DND Voice Mail 7 Voice Mail 8 Voice Mail 9 - Disconnect DESCRIPTION Code sent for receiving calls to record a message (Put Mail). Code sent for message playback (Get Mail). Code sent when voice mail receives a call while the user is busy (Busy Mail). Code sent when voice mail receives a call while the user does not answer (No Answer Mail). Code sent when voice mail receives a call when dialing error exists (Error Mail). Code sent when voice mail receives a call when user is in DND mode (DND Mail). RESERVED RESERVED Code sent when voice mail receives a disconnected call (Disconnect Mail). RANGE 0: Prefix 1: Suffix 0: Prefix 1: Suffix 0: Prefix 1: Suffix 0: Prefix 1: Suffix 0: Prefix 1: Suffix 0: Prefix 1: Suffix 0: Prefix 1: Suffix 0: Prefix 1: Suffix 0: Prefix 1: Suffix
*****

DEFAULT P# P## P#*3P P#*4P P#*5P P#*6P

1.5.8.19 Virtual CLI Table - PGM Code 750

Selecting Virtual CLI Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.19-1.

Figure 1.5.8.19-1 Virtual CLI Table

193

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

This table is used for CLI when a virtual subscriber makes outgoing call at PGM 751 Virtual Subscriber Table. Length of number is 24 digits. This table can be assigned up to 300 for iPECS-MG 300 and 100 for iPECS-MG 100. NOTE B: Begin Copied, E: End Copied, X: any one digit. Virtual CLI is assigned up to 24 digits in case of not including B and E, 25 digits in case of including B or E and 26 digits in case of including both B and E. X should be after the B or E. And, B, E and X cant stand alone.

1.5.8.20 Virtual Subscriber Table - PGM Code 751

Selecting Virtual CLI Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.8.20-1.

Figure 1.5.8.20-1 Virtual Subscriber Table The system can employ Virtual Subscriber to determine the routing of incoming external calls. Each CO/IP Line may be assigned to employ virtual subscriber routing. The system will compare the received CLI and Called number to entries in the Virtual Subscriber Table, and according to the Virtual Subscriber Service Option (PGM 165 Index 17), the system will route the call to the destination. The Virtual Subscriber Table contains incoming CLI, called number, incoming CO group, day/ night/timed class, tenant, maximum virtual calls, digit conversion table, Virtual CLI table index and destination. The incoming CLI can be assigned up to 24 digits. The table can be assigned up to 300 for iPECS-MG 300 and 100 for iPECS-MG 100 tables. NOTE C: any digits (block), N: No CLI, X: any one digit.

194

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

N, X and C cant be used in one CPN type at the same time. C can be only the first or last digit N cant be programmed with other digits.

195

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.8.20-1 Virtual Subscriber Table

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY CLIP Number Called Number CO Incoming Group No DESCRIPTION CLI used to match the index. Called Number to match the index. The CO Group Number to apply Virtual Subscriber route; if not assigned, Virtual Subscriber Service is NOT applied. Virtual Subscribers temporary COS in Day mode. Virtual Subscribers temporary COS in Night mode. Virtual Subscribers temporary COS in Timed mode. The tenant number to be applied the Virtual Subscriber. RANGE 24digits 32digits 172 (MG-300) 124 (MG-100) 0015 0015 0015 19 (MG300) 15 (MG100) 000-254 19. 32digits DEFAULT None None None

Day COS Night COS Timed COS Tenant No

00 00 00 1

Max Virtual Calls Digit Conversion Table Destination Virtual CLI Type

The maximum virtual subscriber service number with same CLI and Called Number at the same time. Specify Digit Conversion Table for Virtual Subscribers destination. If this destination is assigned, received called number is ignored. Virtual CLI Type when virtual subscriber makes outgoing call. All : Apply for all outgoing calls IND: Apply the Virtual CLI differently according to extensions, CO groups(max. 6) and the others. When the destination is an extension, this Virtual CLI index is used for display.

None 1 None ALL

Virtual CLI Table Index for Station

001300 (MG300) 001100 (MG100) 001300 (MG300) 001100 (MG100) Refer to Table 1.5.8.20-1. Refer to Table 1.5.8.20-1.

None

Virtual CLI Table Index for All Cases/Other

1) When Virtual CLI type is ALL 2) When Virtual CLI type is IND and the Virtual CLI index is not specified. Assign the outgoing CO groups for using the Virtual CLI individually. Assign the Virtual CLI Table index for each CO group in Outgoing CO Group.

None

Outgoing CO Group

Virtual CLI Table Index for Outgoing CO Group

196

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.8.20-2 Outgoing CO Group/Virtual CLI

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Outgoing CO Groups for IND type DESCRIPTION The outgoing CO group for using Virtual CLI. RANGE 172 (MG-300) 124 (MG-100) 001300 (MG300) 001100 (MG100) DEFAULT

Virtual CLI Table Index for outgoing CO groups when IND type is selected.

The Virtual CLI Table index for the outgoing CO groups.

197

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9 Tenant Data

Selecting the Tenant Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.9-1.

Figure 1.5.9-1 Tenant Data Main Page

198

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.1 Attendant Group Assignment PGM Code 270

Selecting ATD Group Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.1-1.

Figure 1.5.9.1-1 Attendant Group Assignment The System can have an Attendant Group per tenant; an Attendant Group can contain up to 5 Attendants. Attendant stations can be grouped so that calls will search for an idle attendant in the group. The system allows processing assignment to be Circular, Terminal, Ring, or Longest Idle. Table 1.5.9.1-1 Attendant Group Assignment
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Group Type DESCRIPTION Determines the type of Attendant group. RANGE 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle Max. 16 Max. 4 First Station DEFAULT 0

Group Name CO Attendant Number Member

Determines the name of attendant group. Determines attendant call number for CO line. Assigns stations as members of an attendant group.

199

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.2 Attendant Group Attributes PGM Codes 271272

Selecting Attendant Group Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.2-1.

Figure 1.5.9.2-1 Attendant Group Attributes Each attendant group has available attributes related to greeting and queuing announcements, timers, and also attributes related to announcements, timers, forward, etc. The following Table provides descriptions for the attributes.

200

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.2-1 Attendant Group Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Greeting Tone Type DESCRIPTION Determines the type of greeting tone. RANGE Normal, Prompt, Annc, INT MOH, EXT MOH, VMIB MOH1, VMIB MOH2, VMIB MOH3, VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only), SLT MOH1, SLT MOH2, SLT MOH3, SLT MOH4, SLT MOH5 000180 (sec) 0119 001255 DEFAULT Normal

Greeting Play Timer Greeting Tone No Greeting Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Greeting Repeat Count

Determines greeting play time. Determines greeting tone number in case greeting type is normal. Determines greeting prompt/annc number in case greeting type is PROMPT or ANNC.

000 NOT ASG NOT ASG

Determines the number of times the Greeting will repeat, when greeting type is Prompt or Announcement. After greeting play time, greeting repeat will be stopped. Determines the Pause Timer before greeting is repeated, when greeting type is Prompt or Announcement. Determines the type of queuing tone.

000100

Greeting Repeat Delay Timer Queuing Tone Type

000100 (seconds) Normal, Prompt, Annc, INT MOH, EXT MOH, VMIB MOH1, VMIB MOH2, VMIB MOH3, VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only), SLT MOH1, SLT MOH2, SLT MOH3, SLT MOH4, SLT MOH5 0300

INT MOH

Queuing Forward/Second Queuing Annc. Timer Queuing Tone No

Determines queuing annc timer.

30

Determines tone number in case queuing type is normal.

0119

NOT ASG

201

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.2-1 Attendant Group Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Queuing Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Queuing Repeat Count DESCRIPTION Determines queuing prompt / annc number when queuing type is PROMPT/ANNC. RANGE 001255 DEFAULT NOT ASG

Determines the number of times the queuing will repeat, when queuing type is Prompt or Announcement. After greeting play time, greeting repeat will be stopped. Determines the Pause Timer before queuing is repeated, when queuing type is Prompt or Announcement. This entry defines CCR option when queuing announcement is provided. Determines the type of queuing tone.

000100 0: continuous

Queuing Repeat Delay Timer CCR during First Queuing Announcement Second Queuing Tone Type

000100 (seconds) ON/OFF

OFF

Normal, Prompt, Annc, INT MOH, EXT MOH, VMIB MOH1, VMIB MOH2, VMIB MOH3, VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only), SLT MOH1, SLT MOH2, SLT MOH3, SLT MOH4, SLT MOH5 0300 (seconds)

INT MOH

Second Queuing Forward/Second Queuing Annc. Timer Second Queuing Tone No Second Queuing Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Second Queuing Repeat Count

Determines queuing annc timer or the timer for froward destination.

30

Determines tone number in case queuing type is normal. Determines queuing prompt / annc number when queuing type is PROMPT/ANNC.

0119 001255

NOT ASG NOT ASG

Determines the number of times the second queuing will repeat, when second queuing type is Prompt or Announcement. After second greeting play time, greeting repeat will be stopped. Determines the Pause Timer before second queuing is repeated, when second queuing type is Prompt or Announcement.

000100 0: continuous

Second Queuing Repeat Delay Timer

000100 (seconds)

202

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.2-1 Attendant Group Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Second CCR during First Queuing Announcement CCR during Second Queuing Announcement Call In Greeting Max. Queue Count Forward Type DESCRIPTION This entry defines CCR option during queuing announcement is provided. 01 RANGE DEFAULT 0

This entry defines CCR option when queuing announcement is provided. Determines if a call is routed to attendant while greeting tone is played. Determines queue count. Determines the forward type. 0. Not used 1. Unconditional: a call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2. Queuing overflow: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow. 3. Timeout: a call is routed to a forward destination when a forward timer expired. 4. All: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired. Determines a time to apply forward type.

ON/OFF

OFF

0. After Greeting 1. In Greeting 00~99 0. NOT USED 1. UNCOND 2. Q Overflow 3. Time out 4. All

1 05 NOT USE

Apply Time Type

0. ALL 1. DAY 2. NIGHT 3. TIMED Max. 16 digits 000-600 (100ms) 05-60 (seconds)

ALL

Forward Destination Wrap-Up Timer

Determines a forward destination (trunk access code should be included). Determines the wrap up timer. A member becomes available when this timer expires after a member goes to idle. Determines length of the no answer timer. When this timer expires, a call is routed to the next attendant. Determines attendant call by dialing attendant member. OFF: the call for attendant follows normal call. ON: the call for attendant follows attendant group call. This entry defines ring no answer timer. If this timer is expires, a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type. 0: Provide Answer signal when attendant answer the call 1: Provide Answer signal when greeting or queuing tone is served This entry defines if system provides ring service when a member goes to forward state.

Member No-Answer Timer Attendant Call by Station Number

15

0180 (seconds)

Ring No-Answer Forward Timer Provide Announcement with Answer Ring Service for member in forward

0-180 (seconds)

0: with answer 1: w/o answer

with answer

0: No ring 1: Ring to forwarded station

No ring

203

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.3 Night Attendant Group Assignment PGM Code 275

Selecting Night ATD Group Assignment will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.3-1.

Figure 1.5.9.3-1 Night Attendant Group Assignment Night Attendant Group covers a call while the Attendant station is in an unavailable mode or system goes to night mode. Stations can be grouped as night attendant group so that calls will search for an idle station in the night attendant group. The system allows assignment of processes, Circular, Terminal, Ring, and Longest Idle. Table 1.5.9.3-1 Night Attendant Group Assignment
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Group Type DESCRIPTION Determines the type of night Attendant group. RANGE 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle Max. 16. DEFAULT Terminal

Group Name Member

Determines the name of night attendant group. Assigns stations as members of a night attendant group.

First Station

204

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.4 Night Attendant Group Attributes PGM Codes 276277

Selecting Night ATD Group Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.4-1.

Figure 1.5.9.4-1 Night Attendant Group Attributes Each night attendant group has available attributes related to greeting and queuing announcements, timers and attributes related to announcements, timers, forward, etc. The following Table provides descriptions for the attributes.

205

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.4-1 Night Attendant Group Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Greeting Tone Type DESCRIPTION Determines the type of greeting tone. RANGE Normal, Prompt, Annc, INT MOH, EXT MOH, VMIB MOH1, VMIB MOH2, VMIB MOH3, VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only), SLT MOH1, SLT MOH2, SLT MOH3, SLT MOH4, SLT MOH5 000180 (sec) 0119 001255 DEFAULT Normal

Greeting Play Timer Greeting Tone No Greeting Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Greeting Repeat Count

Determines greeting play time. Determines greeting tone number in case greeting type is normal. Determines greeting prompt/annc number in case greeting type is PROMPT or ANNC.

000 NOT ASG NOT ASG

Determines the number of times the Greeting will repeat, when greeting type is Prompt or Announcement. After greeting play time, greeting repeat will be stopped. Determines the Pause Timer before greeting is repeated, when greeting type is Prompt or Announcement. Determines the type of queuing tone.

000100

Greeting Repeat Delay Timer Queuing Tone Type

000100 (seconds) Normal, Prompt, Annc, INT MOH, EXT MOH, VMIB MOH1, VMIB MOH2, VMIB MOH3, VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only), SLT MOH1, SLT MOH2, SLT MOH3, SLT MOH4, SLT MOH5 000300 (seconds)

INT MOH

Queuing Forward/Second Queuing Annc. Timer Queuing Tone No

Determines queuing forward/second annc timer

30

Determines tone number in case queuing type is normal.

0119

NOT ASG

206

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.4-1 Night Attendant Group Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Queuing Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Queuing Repeat Count Queuing Repeat Delay Timer CCR during First Queuing Announcement Second Queuing Tone Type DESCRIPTION Determines queuing prompt / annc number when queuing type is PROMPT/ANNC. RANGE 001255 DEFAULT NOT ASG

Determines queuing repeat number Determines the Pause Timer before queuing is repeated, when queuing type is Prompt or Announcement. This entry defines CCR option when queuing announcement is provided. Determines the type of queuing tone.

000100 0: continuous 000100 (seconds) ON/OFF

3 0

OFF

Normal, Prompt, Annc, INT MOH, EXT MOH, VMIB MOH1, VMIB MOH2, VMIB MOH3, VMIB MOH4 (MG300 Only), SLT MOH1, SLT MOH2, SLT MOH3, SLT MOH4, SLT MOH5 000300 (seconds) 0119 001255

INT MOH

Second Queuing Forward Timer Second Queuing Tone No Second Queuing Prompt/ Announcement Table No (PGM 259) Second Queuing Repeat Count Second Queuing Repeat Delay Timer CCR during Second Queuing Announcement Second CCR during First Queuing Announcement Call In Greeting

Determines the timer for forward destination. Determines tone number in case queuing type is normal. Determines queuing prompt / annc number when queuing type is PROMPT/ANNC.

30 NOT ASG NOT ASG

Determines queuing repeat number Determines the pause timer before queuing repeat. This entry defines CCR option when queuing announcement is provided. This entry defines CCR option during queuing announcement is provided.

000100 0: continuous 000100 (seconds) ON/OFF

3 0

OFF

01

Determines if a call is routed to attendant while greeting tone is played.

0. After Greeting 1. In Greeting

In Greeting

207

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.4-1 Night Attendant Group Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Max. Queue Count Forward Type DESCRIPTION Determines queue count. Determines the forward type. 0. Not used 1. Unconditional: a call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2. Queuing overflow: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow. 3. Timeout: a call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer expired. 4. All: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired. Determines a time to apply forward type. RANGE 0099 0. NOT USED 1. UNCOND 2. Q Overflow 3. Time out 4. All DEFAULT 05 NOT USED

Apply Time Type

0. ALL 1. DAY 2. NIGHT 3. TIMED Max. 16 digits 000600 (100ms) 0560 (seconds) 0180 (seconds) 0: with answer 1: w/o answer

ALL

Forward Destination Wrap-Up Timer

Determines a forward destination (trunk access code should be included). Determines the wrap up timer. A member becomes available when this timer expires after a member goes to idle. Determines length of the no answer timer. When this timer expires, a call is routed to the next attendant. This entry defines ring no answer timer. If this timer is expires, a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type. This entry defines if system answer the call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided.

10

Member No-Answer Timer Ring No-Answer Forward Timer Provide Announcement with Answer

15

with answer

208

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.5 Tenant Attributes PGM Code 280281

Selecting Tenant Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.5-1.

Figure 1.5.9.5-1 Tenant Attributes One system can be divided as if it consist of several systems. Each station and CO line is assigned to a specific tenant group. Each tenant has available attributes related to Tenant Name, ACNR Retry Count, Wakeup, Authorization, etc.

209

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.5-1 Tenant Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Tenant Name Tenant Name Display Tenant Time Table Index ACNR Retry Count Wake Up Retry Count Wake Up Retry Time Auth Retry Count Multi-Call Forward Service Count Tone Table Index COS down when authorization fail Authorization code fail count for COS down Conference Member Manual Add DESCRIPTION Determines the name of Tenant. Determines Tenant name display. Time Table index of tenant group Determines ACNR retry count. Determines Wakeup retry count. Determines Wakeup retry time. (min) Determines Auth. retry count. Determines Multi Call forward count. Determines Tone Table index for a tenant. Determines the COS down when a authorization is failed Determines the Authorization cod fail count for COS down. Station COS can be changed to 0 after this count. Determines conf-member manual add. ON- CONF member will be added with CONF button. OFF- CONF member will be added automatically. Determines the redial method when user presses [REDIAL] button. 0. ONE TOUCHES CALL: When [REDIAL] button is pressed, redialing is made. 1. ONE TOUCH LOG PHONE: When [REDIAL] button is pressed by phone with 3-soft buttons, redialing is made. If phone does not have 3-soft buttons, redial list is displayed. 2. LIST DIAL: When [REDIAL] button is pressed, redial list is displayed. User selects for redialing. RANGE Max. 16 ON/OFF 19 030 05 0020 05 0110 19 ON/OFF 19 OFF 1 3 3 01 3 05 1 ON 1 DEFAULT

ON/OFF

ON

Redial Method

0: ONE TOUCHES CALL 1: ONE TOUCH LOG PHONE 2: LIST DIAL

LIST DIAL

210

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.5-1 Tenant Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Dial Digit Process DESCRIPTION Determines the dial digit processing method. 0. TYPE 1(R-C-S): If user dials digits, digits are processed as indicated. 1) APPLY TOLL RESTRICTION to all digits including CO access code. 2) CONVERTED 3) SEIZE CO LINE 1. TYPE 2(C-S-R[A]): If user dials digits, digit are processed as indicated. 1) CONVERTED 2) SEIZE CO LINE 3) APPLY TOLL RESTRICTION to all digits including CO access code. 2. TYPE 3(C-S-R[E]): If user dials digits, digit are processed as indicated. 1) CONVERTED 2) SEIZE CO LINE 3) APPLY TOLL RESTRICTION to external telephone number. Determines Transfer CO call to COS 0 Station. Determines Add CO access code to incoming call log. Determines Codec Type (related to Zone Attribute (PGM 395) Codec Type). RANGE 0: TYPE 1 1: TYPE 2 2: TYPE 3 DEFAULT TYPE 3

Transfer CO call to COS 0 Station Add CO access code to incoming call log Codec Type

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON ON

G.711 G.723 G.729 G.722 0. All Off 1. Day On 2. Night On 3. Timed On 4. D/N On 5. D/T On 6. N/T On 7. All On 0: OFF 1: ON 0: System Hold 1: Exclusive Hold 0: OFF 1: ON

G.711

Backlight Auto Mode

This entry allows backlight option of LIP Phone with ring mode.

Day On

Emergency CO Usage Hold Preference Add CO Access code in App. Call Log Reserved

When emergency call is activated, assigned CO line can be seized forcibly. Determines Hold Preference for each tenant. Determines if CO access code is added in call log of application such as UCS Client, Phontage.

OFF System Hold ON

211

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.5-1 Tenant Attributes

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY OffNet Call Forward Tone (Normal CO/ Digital-R2 Type) DESCRIPTION Determines if system provides Off Net Call forward tone when a call is forwarded to off net. RANGE 0: No Tone 1: No Tone, Tone 2: No Tone, After 3: Tone, No Tone 4: Tone, Tone 5: Tone, After 6: After, No Tone 7: After Tone 8: After, After DEFAULT No Tone

DID Called Number Display Allow the First # Digit in CO Call This entry allows first digit # in outgoing CO call. 0: OFF 1: ON OFF

212

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.6 Tenant Group Access PGM Code 283

Selecting Tenant Group Access will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.6-1.

Figure 1.5.9.6-1 Tenant Group Access Stations in a group are allowed or denied access to place intercom/CO calls to stations in other groups on a group-by-group basis.

213

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.7 Call Restriction PGM Codes 284285

Selecting Call Restriction will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.7-1.

Figure 1.5.9.7-1 Call Duration Restrict Attributes The Call Time Restriction can be applied differently according to Call types (ICM, Incoming, Normal Outgoing, Mobile, Local, Long Distance or International Call) 30 Restriction Table can be served for every station and every station can be assigned for reference one of restriction table. Each restriction table has restriction rule about ICM, Incoming, Normal Outgoing, Mobile, Local, Long Distance or International Call and about dedicated CO line. Table 1.5.9.7-1 Call Duration Restriction
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Restriction (ICM Call) Restriction (Incoming Call) Restriction (Normal Outgoing Call) DESCRIPTION Determines the call restriction for Internal Call. Determines the call restriction for Incoming Call. Determines the call restriction for Normal Outgoing Call. (Normal Outgoing Call means not Prefix Outgoing Call and not Mobile Outgoing Call) Determines restriction of Normal CO line. RANGE No restriction Restriction No restriction Restriction No restriction Restriction DEFAULT No restriction No restriction No restriction

Restriction (Prefix Outgoing Call)

No restriction All call Long/International call International call No restriction Restriction No restriction Restriction

No restriction

Restriction (Dedicated CO Line) Restriction (Mobile Call)

Determines restriction of TIE line. Determines the call restriction for Outgoing Call with defined Mobile Number.

No restriction No restriction

214

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.7-1 Call Duration Restriction

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Call Restriction Time (ICM Call) Call Restriction Time (Incoming Call) Call Restriction Time (Normal Outgoing Call) Call Restriction Time (Local Call) Call Restriction Time (Long Call) Call Restriction Time (International Call) Call Restriction Time (Dedicated Line Call) Call Restriction Time (Mobile Call) Service Rule After Restriction Time (ICM Call) Service Rule After Restriction Time (Incoming Call) Service Rule After Restriction Time (Local Call) Service Rule After Restriction Time (Local Call) Service Rule After Restriction Time (Long Distance Call) Service Rule After Restriction Time (International Call) Service Rule After Restriction Time (Dedicated Line Call) Service Rule After Restriction Time (Mobile Call) DESCRIPTION Determines the Restriction timer of Internal calls. Determines the Restriction timer of Incoming calls. Determines the Restriction timer of Outgoing calls. Determines the Restriction timer of Local calls. Determines the Restriction timer of Long Distance calls. Determines the Restriction timer of International calls. Determines the Restriction timer of Dedicated Line calls. Determines the Restriction timer of Mobile calls. Determines the operation of Internal calls after the Restriction timer expires. RANGE 001100 001100 001100 001100 001100 001100 001100 001100 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Warning tone & Drop 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Warning tone & Drop 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Warning tone & Drop 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Warning tone & Drop 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Warning tone & Drop 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Warning tone & Drop 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Warning tone & Drop 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Warning tone & Drop DEFAULT 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 003 Warning tone & Drop

Determines the operation of Incoming calls after the Restriction timer expires.

Warning tone & Drop

Determines the operation of Normal Outgoing calls after the Restriction timer expires. Determines the operation of Local calls after the Restriction timer expires.

Warning tone & Drop

Warning tone & Drop

Determines the operation of Long Distance calls after the Restriction timer expires.

Warning tone & Drop

Determines the operation of International calls after the Restriction timer expires.

Warning tone & Drop

Determines the operation of TIE calls after the Restriction timer expires.

Warning tone & Drop

Determines the operation of Mobile calls after the Restriction timer expires.

Warning tone & Drop

215

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.7-1 Call Duration Restriction

ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Warning Tone Service Time before Line Disconnection (ICM Call) Warning Tone Service Time before Line Disconnection (Incoming Call) Warning Tone Service Time before Line Disconnection (Normal Outgoing Call) Warning Tone Service Time before Line Disconnection (Local Call) Warning Tone Service Time before Line Disconnection (Long Call) Warning Tone Service Time before Line Disconnection (International Call) Warning Tone Service Time before Line Disconnection (Dedicated Line Call) Warning Tone Service Time before Line Disconnection (Mobile Call) Repeat Tone Interval Time (ICM Call) Repeat Tone Interval Time (Incoming Call) Repeat Tone Interval Time (Normal Outgoing Call) Repeat Tone Interval Time (Local Call) Repeat Tone Interval Time (Local Call) Repeat Tone Interval Time (International Call) Repeat Tone Interval Time (Dedicated Line Call) Repeat Tone Interval Time (Mobile Call) DESCRIPTION Determines entry defines Disconnect timer of Internal calls. Determines entry defines Disconnect timer of Incoming calls. Determines entry defines Disconnect timer of Outgoing calls. Determines entry defines Disconnect timer of Local calls. Determines the disconnect timer of Long Distance calls. Determines the Disconnect timer of International calls. Determines the Disconnect timer of Dedicated Line calls. Determines entry defines Disconnect timer of Mobile calls. Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Internal calls. Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Incoming calls. Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Normal Outgoing calls. Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Local calls. Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Long Distance calls. Determines the Tone Repeat timer of International calls. Determines the Repeat timer of Dedicated Line calls. Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Mobile calls. RANGE 1060 DEFAULT 15

1060

15

1060

15

1060

15

1060

15

1060

15

1060

15

1060

15

010254 010254 010254 010254 010254 010254 010254 010254

020 020 020 020 020 020 020 020

216

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.8 Local Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 286

Selecting Local Call Prefix Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.8-1.

Figure 1.5.9.8-1 Local Call Prefix Table The call type for Call Duration Restriction (CDR) can be applied differently according to the call Prefix Table.

217

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.9 Long Distance Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 287

Selecting Long Call Prefix Table will display the Tenant page shown, Figure 1.5.9.9-1.

Figure 1.5.9.9-1 Long Call Prefix Table The call type for Call Duration Restriction (CDR) can be applied differently according to the call Prefix Table.

218

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.10 International Call Prefix Tables PGM Code 288

Selecting International Call Prefix Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.10-1.

Figure 1.5.9.10-1 International Call Prefix Table The call type for Call Duration Restriction (CDR) can be applied differently according to the call Prefix Table.

219

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.11 Mobile Call Prefix Tables - PGM Code 289

Selecting Mobile Call Prefix Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.11-1.

Figure 1.5.9.11-1 Mobile Call Prefix Table The call type for Call Duration Restriction (CDR) can be applied differently according to the call Prefix Table.

220

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.9.12 Tone Tables PGM Code 290

Selecting Tone Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.9.12-1.

Figure 1.5.9.12-1 Tone Table The system provides 78 tone types. Each tone may be assigned as normal tone, VMIB prompt/ Announcement or internal/external music. Table 1.5.9.12-1 Tone Table
ATTRIBUTE/DISPLAY Tone Type DESCRIPTION The Tone type RANGE 01: Normal Tone 02: VMIB Prompt 03: VMIB Announcement 04: Internal MOH 05: External MOH 0609: VMIB MOH 1/2/3/ 4 1014: SLT MOH 15 15: Not Use 0600 119 DEFAULT

Tone Time Tone Port

Determines the amount of time the tone is provided. The Tone port index of PGM 264. The cadence of tone port may be changed by web-admin. The VMIB Prompt or Announcement number [PGM259] when tone type is VMIB Prompt or announcement. The VMIB Prompt or Announcement Repeat number when tone type is VMIB Prompt or announcement. The VMIB Prompt or Announcement Repeat interval when VMIB Prompt or announcement. Repeat is assigned.

Prompt/Announcement No. Prompt / Announcement Repeat number Prompt / Announcement Interval

1255

0100

0100

221

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.12-2 Tone Index Table

INDEX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 1st Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone CO Dial Tone DISA Dial Tone LCR Virtual Tone Digit Conversion Virtual Tone Password Dial Tone Internal Busy Tone External Busy Tone CO Line Busy Tone Uncompleted Dial Error Tone DOD Restriction Tone Internal No-Answer Tone External No-Answer Tone Internal Vacant Error Tone External Vacant Error one Call Duration Restriction Tone Anonymous Call Restriction Tone Error Tone (All the other cases) Relative Blocking Relative Line Lock Out Relative Do Not Disturb Relative Absence Relative Out of Order External Relative Out of Order External Relative Outgoing Restriction Relative Hot Desk Logout Howling Tone 1st Ring Back Tone TONE NAME DESCRIPTION This is provided when station goes off-hook. This is provided when station presses [Trans] button during conversation to transfer the call. This is provided to transit CO line if he accesses CO line which does not provide CO Dial Tone. This is provided to external caller through DISA. Reserved This is provided when station dials Dummy Dial-Tone Digit in PGM 240. This is provided when station dials conference room number having password. This is provided to external caller through DID/DISA when he calls the busy station. This is provided when station makes an external call to telephone in use. This is provided to station when there is no idle CO line. This is provided when station does not dial within inter-digit timer during dialing. This is provided when station dials the toll restriction digits. This is provided when the called station does not answer within Normal Call Ring Time of Ring Table. This is provided when the called external user does not answer. This is provided when stations calls vacant number. This is provided when stations calls vacant external telephone number. Reserved Reserved This is provided in all error cases This is provided when station calls the blocked station. This is provided when station calls station hearing howling tone. This is provided when station calls station in DND. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved This is provided after error tone. This is provided when station calls another station.

222

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.12-2 Tone Index Table

INDEX 30 31 TONE NAME 2nd Ring Back Tone CO Ring Back Tone Reserved This is provided to external caller if the incoming call is routed to the destination. And it is provided when station calls external call through CO line with Provided Ring Back Tone in PGM 171. Reserved This is provided when station makes a paging. This is provided when station makes a command conference group call. This is provided when station goes off hook if message is left. This is provided when station goes off hook if DND is set. This is provided when station goes off hook if Call Forward is set. This is provided when station goes off hook if pre-selected message is set. This is provided to station if camp-on is requested. This is provided to station if station makes conference call. This is provided when station adds conference member. This is provided to station if call-wait is requested. Reserved This is provided when station enters conference room. This is provided when conference member is deleted. This is provided to station with CDR disconnection indication before the forced disconnection. This is confirmation tone. This is provided when stains dials wrong input during programming. This is provided to the external user when he is transferred. This is provided to the station when he is transferred. This is provided to the external user when using camp on. This is provided to the station when he is camped on. This is provided to the external user when he is waited. This is provided to the station when he is waited. This is provided to the external user in hold. This is provided to station in hold. Reserved DESCRIPTION

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57

Recall Ring Back Tone Zone Paging Call Ring Back Tone Command Call Ring Back Tone Alert Message Wait Alert Do not Disturb Alert Call Forward Alert Absence Camp on Alarm Conference Alarm Conference Join Call Wait Alarm Break In Alarm Conference Room In Conference Room Out Call Duration Restriction Alarm Confirm Tone Single Error Tone Transfer Hold Tone Transfer Hold Tone (Station) Camp On Hold Tone (CO) Camp On Hold Tone (Station) Call Wait Hold Tone (CO) Call Wait Hold Tone (Station) Normal Hold Tone (CO) Normal Hold Tone (Station) Normal Hold Tone (Attendant)

223

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.9.12-2 Tone Index Table

INDEX 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 TONE NAME Call Park Hold Tone Call Park Hold Tone (Station) IC Auto Hold Tone IC Auto Hold Tone (Attendant) Command Call Answer Tone R2 Normal Outgoing Tone R2 Off-net Call Forward Tone Wake-up Answer Tone Service Set Tone DISA Retry Tone ICLID Restrict Tone Auto Call Answer Alert Tone VM Interaction Confirm Tone Authorization Code Dial Tone Tenant Dial Tone Two-way Record Warning Tone TIE Line Ring Back Tone LCM Traffic Over Tone Screened Transfer Alert Tone SMonitor Record Waning Tone Wireless Station Searching Tone DESCRIPTION This is provided to the external user in parked. This is provided to the station in parked. This is provided when conference member is held. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved This is provided when station answers wake-up ring. This is provided when station sets programming. This is provided as DISA retry tone when external user dials wrong digits. Reserved This is provided when station is connected with handsfree. This is provided when station records his call through USB module. This is provided when station is requested auth code dial at the call forward assign, walking co and so on. Reserved This is provided to the associate party when station starts call recording. This is provided when an outgoing call is made through TIE lines. This is provided when LCM traffic overflows its maximum. This is provided to the associate parties when screened transfer is completed. This is provided to the associate parties when silent monitor feature is started When a DECT station is called, the caller will hear this tone until the called station is found.

224

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.10 Board Data

Selecting the Board Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.10-1.

Figure 1.5.10-1 Board Data Main Page

225

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.10.1 ISDN Board Attribute PGM Code 300

Selecting ISDN Board Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.10.1-1.

Figure 1.5.10.1-1 ISDN/Digital Board Attribute PRIB, BRIB, E1R2 boards have the following attributes which can be programmed using the Web Admin.

226

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.10.1-1 ISDN Board Attribute

ATTRIBUTE PRIB/T1 CRC Check PRIB/T1 Line Mode BRIB TEI Mode BRIB Reference Clock T1 Mode T1 Line Mode T1 Pause Time T1 PLS Rate DESCRIPTION Enable CRC check of PRIB. NT/ TE mode of PRIB; after changing mode, the board is automatically restarted. TEI mode of BRIB Port 1/2/3/4 Reference Clock of BRIB Port 1/2/3/4 T1 Mode (D4/ESF) T1 Line Mode (B8ZS/AMI) T1 Pause Time (100 msec) T1 PLS Rate RANGE Disable / Enable TE / NT Fixed / Auto Use/Not Use D4 ESF 0: B8ZS 1: AMI 19 0: 10PPS 60/40 1: 10 PPS 66/33 2: 20PPS 60/40 3: 20 PPS 66/33 160 250 715 0127 0127 29 1060 DEFAULT Enable TE Auto Use D4 B8ZS 2 10 PPS 60/40

T1 Release Guard Time T1 DT Delay Time T1 Wink Time T1 Seize Time T1 Release Time T1 Ring Detect Time T1 Ring Stop Time

T1 release guard time (100 msec) T1 DT Delay time (100 msec) T1 Wink time (20 msec) T1 seize time (20 msec) T1 release time (20 msec) T1 ring detect time (100 msec) T1 ring stop time (100 msec)

20 10 10 3 7 2 60

227

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.10.2 ISDN Board Clock Priority PGM Code 301

Selecting ISDN Board Clock Priority Attributes will display the page, Figure 1.5.10.2-1.

Figure 1.5.10.2-1 ISDN Clock Priority In the iPECS-MG system, clock synchronization is controlled by the pre-programmed ISDN clock priority. The first ISDN board becomes clock master board and if an error occurs to clock master board, the next board takes on the role as a master clock. After original master board is recovered, clock master board is changed again. If there is no available ISDN board to become a clock master board, the system is synchronized with internal clock.

228

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.10.3 VOIB/VMIB Board Attribute PGM Code 305

Selecting VOIB/VMIB Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.10.3-1.

Figure 1.5.10.3-1 VOIB/VMIB Attributes Table 1.5.10.3-1 VOIB/VMIB Board Attributes

ATTRIBUTE IP Address Router IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP Usage T38 Usage RTP Security VLAN Priority Diffserv WEB Port DESCRIPTION IP Address of selected slot. Router IP Address of selected slot. Subnet Mask of selected slot. DHCP Usage. T38 Usage. RTP Security Usage. Determines VLAN value. Determines Priority value. Determines Diffserv. WEB Page Port Number for VMIB. (When Selected Slot is VMIB, WEB Port menu will be displayed.) RANGE IP Address IP Address IP Address OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON 04096, none 07 063 00001-65535 DEFAULT 10. 10. 10. # (# : slot number) 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 OFF OFF OFF none 0 0 80

229

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.10.4 Reset Board PGM Code 310

Each board in the system can be reset with this menu.

Figure 1.5.10.4-1 Reset Board

230

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.11 Networking Data

Selecting the Networking Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed, Figure 1.5.11-1.

Figure 1.5.11-1 Networking Data Main Page

231

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.11.1 Net Basic Attribute PGM Code 320

Selecting Network Basic Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.11.1-1.

Figure 1.5.11.1-1 Networking Attributes Table 1.5.11.1-1 Network Basic Attribute

ATTRIBUTE NET Enable NET CNIP Enable DESCRIPTION Enables Networking function. The name of calling station is sent to the called system between iPECS systems. CNIP is displayed at called party stations display based on the programming. The name of calling station is sent to the called system between ipLDK systems. CNIP is displayed on the called party station LCD according to ADMIN programming. If the CNIP and CLI are received together, CNIP is prior to CLI. Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message. If this value is set to ON, the networking supplementary signaling of call completion retain mode is executed. Used to set Networking BLF service Used to set the TCP port for BLF messaging. Used to set the UDP port for BLF messaging. RANGE OFF/ON OFF/ON DEFAULT OFF ON

NET CONP Enable

OFF/ON

OFF

NET Signal Method NET CC Retain

OFF/ON OFF/ON

FACILITY OFF

NET BLF Usage TCP Port for BLF UDP Port for BLF

OFF/ON 9000 9999 9000 9999

OFF 9000 9001

232

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.11.1-1 Network Basic Attribute

ATTRIBUTE Duration of BLF STS BLF Manager IP Address DESCRIPTION Used to set the duration of BLF status messaging. Used to set the IP Address for the BLF manager. IP Address of BLF Server used only when iPECS-MG is configured with LDK/iPECS systems for Voice Networking (Reserved). Assign Prefix Number for networking numbering plan of own system. Assign Centralized Voice Mail Group number to support VM MWI. RANGE 0199 DEFAULT 10 0.0.0.0

Own Prefix Number Net Voice Mail Group Number

Max 8 digits Max 8 digits

233

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.11.2 Net Numbering Plan Table PGM Code 321

Selecting Network Numbering Plan Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.11.2-1.

Figure 1.5.11.2-1 Networking Numbering Table 1.5.11.2-1 Network Numbering Plan

ATTRIBUTE Numbering Plan Type Numbering Plan Code DESCRIPTION Used to set the networking numbering plan type of the selected table entries. Used to set the networking number code of the selected table entries. X means any digits can be inserted between 09. (Select MUTE button for input X.) Used to select the CO line group for routing networking calls. This AND digits added when Digit Repeat option is ON. When the number plan code (Flex 2) is for PSTN call or transit-call, this number code can be enveloped in SETUP message if set to ON. Used to set the digit sending mode(Overlap or Enblock) of the selected table entries. CPN information for ISDN, IP address for VOIP (CPN info 1-CPN info 4). IP address of destination system used only when iPECS-MG is configured with LDK/iPECS systems for Voice Networking. Used to set the UDP port for sending the message such as DECT mobility to destination system. 0-9999 0.0.0.0 RANGE NET / TRANSIT 8digits DEFAULT NET

Outgoing CO Group No AND Digit AND Digit Repeat

0172 10 digits ON/OFF OFF

Digit Sending Mode CPN Information 1 ~ 4 Destination System IP Address Destination System Port

Enblock / Overlap

Overlap

9000

234

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.11.2-1 Network Numbering Plan

ATTRIBUTE Firewall Routing DESCRIPTION This ADMIN program determines that this table is local network or different network. Select IP address (Firewall IP address or Non-firewall IP address); if the destination system is in same VPN then Non-firewall IP address should be sent. ON: Send firewall IP address OFF: Send Non-firewall (Internal) IP address RANGE OFF/ON DEFAULT ON

235

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.12 T-Net Data

Selecting the TNET Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.12-1.

Figure 1.5.12-1 T-Net Data In a Centralized Control TNET (Transparent Networking), remote devices may be registered to a Central MFIM (CM) and to a Local MFIM (LM). In this way, the CM maintains control of the remote device. Should the WAN connection between an LM and CM fail (2 second polling error), the LM will initiate operational control of the locally registered devices. Calls between the systems (CM & LM) can automatically shift to PSTN Modules registered with the LM for Fail-over operation. The configuration and characteristics of LMs and CM are configurable as is Fail-over operation.

236

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.12.1 T-Net Attribute PGM Code 330

Selecting T-Net Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.12.1-1.

Figure 1.5.12.1-1 T-Net Attribute Each MFIM in a Central Control network environment must be enabled for TNET operation in order to function as part of the network.

237

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.12.2 CM Attribute PGM Code 331

Selecting CM Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.12.2-1.

Figure 1.5.12.2-1 CM Attributes Each LM (Local MFIM), which is part of a Central Control Network, must be defined with the IP Address of the CM (Central MFIM) as well as the LM configuration data that will be sent to the CM at the time the LM registers with the CM. Total port counts define the ports, which are allocated in the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM. Table 1.5.12.2-1 CM Attributes
DISPLAY Register Enable IP Address IPKTS Port number DESCRIPTION Sets the LM to attempt registration with the CM. This field must be set to ON for proper registration. Determines the IP address of the CM used by the LM. In the TNET environment, the IP KTS protocol signaling UDP port is defined (do not change from default). Determines the total number of ports the LM will request be allocated by the CM for devices attached to the LM. This value must be equal to or less than the port count in the CM for the LM devices. Determines the maximum polling failures an LM considers a WAN fault. Determines the interval time between LM to CM polling attempts. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON IPv4 address 0001 9999 000999 DEFAULT ON 0.0.0.0 5588

Total no of ports

000

Polling Count Polling Interval

0099 0099

05 02

238

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.12.3 FoPSTN Attribute PGM Code 333

Selecting FoPSTN table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.12.3-1.

Figure 1.5.12.3-1 FoPSTN Attributes The Fail-over function allows the systems in a Centralized Control network (TNET) environment to complete calls from system to system over a PSTN (analog or digital) line should the WAN connection to the CM fail. A CO gateway Module must be registered to the LM for local control and access CO services. Users may call others in the normal manner and the call is routed over CO facilities to the remote CM. When calls are directed to a DID line at the receiving system, the system will select a line from the assigned CO Group and dial the telephone number with the station number dialed as the trailing digits.

239

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.12.3-1 FoPSTN Attributes

DISPLAY Enable FoPSTN Initialize FoPSTN Index Numbering Plan CO Group Station numbers associated with the remote system. Defines the CO Group of the local system that will be used to place calls to the stations entered in the FO Numbering Plan, should WAN failure occur. Defines the telephone number the system should dial to place a call to the stations entered in the FO Numbering Plan, should Wan failure occur. DESCRIPTION This field is used to enable or disable Fail-over operation from the CM or LM. Initializes the FO table. 1100 (MG-100) 1200 (MG-300) Max. 16 124 (MG-100) 172 (MG-300) RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON DEFAULT OFF

Tel Number

Max. 10

240

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.12.4 T-Net Board Attribute PGM Code 344

Selecting T-Net Board Attribute will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.12.4-1.

Figure 1.5.12.4-1 T-Net Board Attribute When a board or iPECS-gateway module is connected in a Centralized Control network (TNET), the TNET operation of the board or iPECS-gateway module can be enabled or disabled.

241

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.12.5 IP-Phone T-Net Enable PGM Code 335

Selecting IP-Phone T-Net Enable will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.12.5-1.

Figure 1.5.12.5-1 IP-Phone T-Net Enable When an IP-Phone is connected in a Centralized Control network (TNET), the TNET operation of the IP Phone can be enabled or disabled.

242

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.13 H.323 Data

Selecting the H.323 Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.13-1.

Figure 1.5.13-1 H.323 Data Main Page

243

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.13.1 H.323 Routing Attributes PGM Code 360

Selecting H.323 Routing Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.13.1-1.

Figure 1.5.13.1-1 H.323 Routing Attributes To allow direct H.323, the system assigns unique number to each H323 IP address. Direct H.323 can be made by dialing the assigned number. Table 1.5.13.1-1 H.323 Routing Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Digit Destination IP Address DESCRIPTION Designates numbers associated with the H.323 routing system. Designates IP address associated with the H.323 routing system. RANGE MAX 8 digits 0.0.0.0 DEFAULT

244

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.13.2 H.323 Call Setup Attribute PGM Code 361

Selecting H.323 Call Setup Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.13.2-1.

Figure 1.5.13.2-1 H.323 Call Setup Attributes When the standard H.323 VoIP protocol is employed for an external VoIP call, several attributes including the H.323 call set-up mode and tunneling (H.245 Encapsulation) can be established. This H.323 Call Setup Attributes also allows setting the IP TOS bit for Diffserv, a commonly recognized packet prioritization protocol. Higher priority packets are given priority in the Router or Layer 3 Switch queue. However, they are the first to be discarded in the event of long queue delays, which may cause excess packet loss and poor voice quality. Refer to the following Table for a description of the features and the input required.

245

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.13.2-1 H.323 Call Setup Attribute

ATTRIBUTE H.323 Setup Mode H.323 Tunneling Mode H.323 DTMF Path DESCRIPTION H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.323 normal or Fast Start mode. H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.245 encapsulation (Tunneling). During a connection, DTMF digits can be sent in-band or out of band (H.245). RANGE 1: Normal 1: Fast 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Inband 1: RFC2833 2: out 063 DEFAULT FAST ON Inband

DiffServ

Diffserv pre-tagging for Voice packet. NOTE High values may cause high packet discard levels.

First Codec Type

Determines First Codec Type.

Not Use G.711U G.711A G.729 G.723A Not Use G.711U G.711A G.729 G.723A Not Use G.711U G.711A G.729 G.723A Not Use G.711U G.711A G.729 G.723A 0: OFF 1: ON

G.711A

Second Codec Type

Determines Second Codec Type.

Not Use

Third Codec Type

Determines Third Codec Type.

Not Use

Fourth Codec Type

Determines Fourth Codec Type.

Not Use

GateKeeper USED

Used to determine if Gatekeeper will be used.

OFF

246

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.13.3 H.323 Incoming Attributes PGM Code 362

Selecting H.323 Incoming Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.13.3-1.

Figure 1.5.13.3-1 H.323 Incoming Attribute To obtain direct H.323, the From IP-Address and the CO Group number to be routed should be assigned. Table 1.5.13.3-1 H.323 VOIB Attribute
ATTRIBUTE From IP Address DESCRIPTION IP address associated with the H.323 incoming call. The index 0 is used when external call comes from unknown IP Address which is not listed in this table entry. CO group number associated with the H.323 incoming call. Destination fire wall IP address associated with the FROM IP address. Determines if FROM IP will be used check message. 0: OFF 1: ON 0172 0.0.0.0 OFF RANGE DEFAULT 0.0.0.0

Incoming CO Group Number FW IP Address Check Message Option

247

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.13.4 GateKeeper Attributes PGM Code 363

Selecting GK Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.13.4-1.

Figure 1.5.13.4-1 GateKeeper Attributes Table 1.5.13.4-1 Gatekeeper Attributes

ATTRIBUTE GateKeeper RAS Light RRQ Usage DESCRIPTION Determine whether MPB will be used as a GateKeeper. The system can be assigned to use the simple Registration Request (RRQ) message (ON) or the full RRQ message (OFF). Multi-cast IP address for RAS Information of Gatekeeper. Multi-cast IP Port for RAS Information of Gatekeeper. Uni-cast IP address for RAS Information of Gatekeeper. Uni-cast IP Port for RAS Information of Gatekeeper. The system will send a polling message every KEEP ALIVE TIME seconds to assure the status of the connection. The numbering plan for Calling Number in RAS Setup. The GateKeeper ID; In keyset admin, only 24 digits can be checked or programmed. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON IP Address IP Port # (09999) IP Address IP Port # (09999) 11000 DEFAULT OFF OFF

Multicast GateKeeper IP Address Multicase GateKeeper Port Unicast GateKeeper IP Address Unicast GateKeeper Port Keep Alive Time

0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 1719 120

Gateway Prefix H.323 Gateway ID

MAX 25 Digits MAX 129 Digits

248

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.13.5 H.323 Check Message Information - PGM Code 364

Selecting H.323 Check Message Information will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.13.5-1.

Figure 1.5.13.5-1 H.323 Check Message Information To get the direct H.323, the From IP-Address and the incoming CO Group number to be routed should be assigned. Table 1.5.13.5-1 H.323 Check Message Information
ATTRIBUTE Retry Count DESCRIPTION Determines the retry count; following MG sending the ping and reply message is not received in return. This field indicates the time interval to send ping message periodically. RANGE 01-10 DEFAULT 03

Session Check Timer

0030-3600

0030

249

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.14 SIP CO Data

Selecting the SIP CO Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.14-1.

Figure 1.5.14-1 SIP Data Main Page

250

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.14.1 SIP CO Basic Registration

Selecting SIP CO Basic Registration will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.14.1-1.

Figure 1.5.14.1-1 SIP CO Basic Registration Table 1.5.14.1-1 SIP CO Basic Registration Attribute
ATTRIBUTE Main Proxy Address DESCRIPTION SIP proxy is the element that routes SIP requests to User Agent servers and SIP responses to User Agent clients. Main Proxy Port number to communicate with Main Proxy server. SIP user domain name; when a user makes a SIP outgoing call, this domain name is added to the dialed digits. (ex., <dialed digit> @domain.name.com) Proxy Domain Name; if proxy does not have a domain name, then set the proxy IP address. SIP Proxy Type that is used in SIP CO calling. Normal / Dacom / KT Normal 1024 9999 5060 RANGE DEFAULT

Main Proxy Port Main Domain Name

Proxy Type

251

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.14.2 SIP CO Additional Registration

Selecting SIP CO Additional Registration will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.14.2-1.

Figure 1.5.14.2-1 SIP CO Additional Registration

252

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.14.2-1 SIP CO Additional Registration Attributes

ATTRIBUTE User ID Start Index User ID End Index Main Outbound Proxy Address Main Outbound Proxy Port Sub Proxy Address Sub Proxy Port Sub Domain Name Sub Outbound Proxy Address Sub Outbound Proxy Port Connection Mode Registration Timer 100rel Support DESCRIPTION Sets the Start User ID Index for SIP CO group In SIP CO Basic Registration Attributes Sets the End User ID Index for SIP CO group In SIP CO Basic Registration Attributes If the Proxy Server has both a registration server and call processing server, this field indicates the call processing server address. Main outbound proxy port number to receive SIP messages. Second Proxy IP Address. Generally, used to register with the IMS Server. Second Proxy Port number Second Domain name Second Outbound proxy Outbound Address Second Outbound proxy port number Transport protocol type to send/receive SIP messages. Registration Time Interval to resend the Registration message to proxy. Increases reliability; if both systems set 100rel to ON, then system will send the PRACK message when receiving the 18x message. Used to recover the communication path. The time at which an element will consider the call timed out, if no successful INVITE transaction or UPDATE transaction occurs beforehand. This value is inserted into every INVITE and UPDATE transaction in the Session-Expires header unless it was configured to zero. A zero session Expires means that the Session Timer feature is turned off. If the timer option tag is not part of the supported list, the session Expires value will be ignored. The minimum value for the session interval that the application is willing to accept. If the application does not set this parameter, the minSE value is set to the default value of 90 seconds according to the Session Timer RFC. Also, the Min-SE header will not be present in the sent requests (except for a request, following a 422 response). However, if the application sets this parameter to 90 or any other value, the Min-SE header will appear in any sent request. Time interval to send check message (Re-Invite or UPDATE) by period. 1024 9999 UDP / TCP / TLS 6086400 ON/OFF 5060 UDP 3600 OFF 1024 9999 5060 1024 9999 5060 RANGE DEFAULT

Session Timer Support Max. Session Timer

ON/OFF 1803600

OFF 1800

Min. Session Timer

60150

90

253

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.14.2-1 SIP CO Additional Registration Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Use 181 Message DESCRIPTION If this feature is set to ON, 181 message is supported (call is being forwarded to a different set of destinations). If this feature is set to ON, R-port is supported, which is used for NAT traversal problems. his field uses private extensions to the SIP that enable a network of trusted SIP servers to assert the identify of authenticated users, and the application of existing privacy mechanisms to the identify problem. The use of these extensions is only applicable inside an administrative domain with previously agreed-upon policies for generation, transport and usage of such information. If this feature is set to ON, Asserted-ID service is supported. Used to set the DTMF mode of SIP CO group. RANGE ON/OFF DEFAULT OFF

Use RPORT P-Asserted-Identity

ON/OFF NOT USE / USE

OFF NOT USE

DTMF Send Mode

IN / OUT / RFC2833

RFC2833

254

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.14.3 SIP CO Codec

Selecting SIP CO Codec will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.14.3-1.

Figure 1.5.14.3-1 SIP CO Codec Table 1.5.14.3-1 SIP CO Codec Attribute

ATTRIBUTE First Codec Type Second Codec Type Third Codec Type Fourth Codec Type Fifth Codec Type DESCRIPTION Codec Types to send voice packets using RTP. RANGE Not Use, G.711U, G.711A, G.729, G.723, G.729A DEFAULT G.711A Not Use Not Use Not Use Not Use

255

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.14.4 SIP CO User ID Table

Selecting SIP CO User ID Table will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.14.4-1.

Figure 1.5.14.4-1 SIP User ID Table Table 1.5.14.4-1 SIP User-ID Table Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Registration User ID DESCRIPTION This Admin is used to setting SIP user ID. Set SIP user ID which is used From Header except domain name. This Admin is used to setting SIP Authentication User ID. Set authentication user ID if authentication is used. This Admin is used for setting SIP Authentication User Password; set authentication user password if authentication is used. This Admin is used for setting User ID Registration; determines registration of the SIP UID. When value is set to ON, determines the use of the SIP User ID. This Admin is used for setting the Contact Number; STA use station CLI rules and User ID set Representative ID to SIP User ID automatically(this will be make Contact Number to User ID). This ADMIN program determines that this table is local network or different network. If not use Contact, all is same with previous methods of making CONTACT field. If have some value, this value always used for CONTACT field not considering STA or CO Group selection. YES / NO YES / NO STA, User ID NO NO User ID RANGE DEFAULT

Authentication User ID Authentication User Password Registration Usage Contact Num (PGM 170-11,12)

Firewall Routing Contact

YES / NO

YES

256

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.15 SIP Station Data

Selecting the SIP Station Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.15-1.

Figure 1.5.15-1 SIP Station Data Main Page NOTE SIP phone need lock key install except LIP-8002 and ACT-50.

257

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.15.1 SIP Station Basic Registration

Selecting SIP CO Basic Registration will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.15.1-1.

Figure 1.5.15.1-1 SIP STA Basic Registration Table 1.5.15.1-1 SIP STA Basic Registration Attributes
ATTRIBUTE User ID DESCRIPTION SIP Ext. User ID. If MG explicitly assigned the user id for that SIP Ext., then User ID will be SIP Ext.s Station number. Authentication name assigned in SIP Proxy when required for registration. User password as assigned in SIP Proxy when required for registration. RANGE DEFAULT

Authentication ID Password

258

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.15.2 SIP Station Additional Registration

Selecting SIP STA Additional Registration will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.15.2-1.

Figure 1.5.15.2-1 SIP STA Additional Registration

259

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.15.2-1 SIP STA Additional Registration Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Station Number Registering Mode DESCRIPTION SIP Ext. Station number that assigned by iPECS-MG Determines if the SIP Proxy will be registered using Register message or Not. If set to No, then administrator should set SIP Ext. IP address and Port number values by hand. Determines the SIP Ext. Registration status. Determines the SIP Ext. IP Address. Determines the SIP Ext. Port number. Determines if the SIP Ext. is used within the NAT Router. Determines the transport protocol to send/receive SIP messages. Used to Set the SIP Ext. type NO NAT / NAT UDP / TCP / TLS Normal / MOIMSTONE / IP-1535 0 No NAT UDP Normal Manual / User Register Manual RANGE DEFAULT

Registration Status IP Address IP Port Device NAT Usage Transfer Mode SIP Phone Type

Not Registered / Registered

Not Registered

Registration Timer Keep Alive Usage

Registration Time Interval to resend the Registration message from SIP Ext. to iPECS-MG This field will be used to check SIP Ext.s Status. If this field set to ON, OPTION message periodically send to SIP Ext to check the stations status. ON/OFF

3600 OFF

260

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.15.3 SIP Station Service

Selecting SIP STATION Attributes will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.15.3-1.

Figure 1.5.15.3-1 SIP Station Attribute Table 1.5.15.3-1 SIP Station Attribute
ATTRIBUTE Check Message Send Timer DESCRIPTION The system can check the SIP extension status using OPTION Message. This field indicates the time interval to send OPTION message periodically. Determines the retry count to send the OPTION message when ACK message is not received in return. Determines if MG authentication is done for each call using 407 messages. PRACK Sending Option Periodical Communication Path recovery Option Maximum time to maintain the communication path Time interval to send the check message (Re-Invite or UPDATE) by period. RANGE 103600 DEFAULT 30

Retry Count

310

407 Authentication 100rel Support Session Timer Support Max. Session Timer Min. Session Timer

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 1803600 60150

OFF OFF OFF 1800 90

261

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.16 Zone Data

Selecting the Zone Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed, Figure 1.5.16-1.

Figure 1.5.16-1 Zone Data Zone data is a tool employed to easily manage the characteristics of groups of devices under the control of a MPB. Often, devices are installed in groups with common characteristics. Such devices can be grouped to a Zone to define common characteristics including Country Code, VMIB, RTP packet handling, etc. Common attributes may be defined at the device, Zone and Inter-zone level. Device settings have priority over Zone settings, while Zone settings have priority over system settings. Generally, transport of RTP packets should be a peer-to-peer communication over either a LAN or VPN. If devices are separated by a NAPT server or direct peer-to-peer communications is not available, packet relay must be employed to assure communication. In packet relay, RTP packets are received by a local VoIP channel (MPB or VOIB), which is under control of the MPB, and the IP address is translated from a public one to the devices private address. The VOIB VoIP channels implement a secure channel using IPSec protocol. Devices can be assigned as part of a RTP Relay group to use the same VoIP channels to implement RTP packet relay. NOTE Packet relay requires a MPB or VOIB VoIP channel be available locally for each simultaneous call that requires packet relay. The sub menus of Zone Data define device zone assignments and zone configurations. These programs are only available in Web admin.

262

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.16.1 Zone Attributes PGM Code 395

Selecting the Zone Attribute returns the page shown, inFigure 1.5.16.1-1. Enter the desired Zone number range and click Load to assign Zone characteristics.

Figure 1.5.16.1-1 Zone Attribute The Zone Attributes define when and which VoIP channels to use for RTP packet relay. Local VoIP channels are assigned to perform the packet relay function and the use can be defined as Automatic or Follow Relay Group. For Automatic, the MP will employ the IP KTS STUN protocol to determine when packet relay is required. If assigned Follow Relay Group, packet relay will always be employed for RTP packet receipt. Table 1.5.16.1-1 Zone Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Nation Code DESCRIPTION Nation Code of the Zone RANGE DEFAULT Same with systems nation

Memo Codec Type

Memo The codec selection method can be defined as device based, see PGM 281, or based on the codec type assigned to the Zone. Assigns when to use the packet relay function, with Automatic the MPB will automatically determine when to use packet relay, while RTP Relay Group will always implement packet relay for RTP packets. Assigns the VOIB slot used to support RTP relay for devices in the Zone. Assigns the VMIB slot used to support Voice Mail for devices in the Zone. Tenant Codec / G.711 / G.723 / G.729 / G.722 / Not Assign Automatic / Follow Relay Group Tenant Codec

RTP Relay Rule

Automatic

VOIB Slot for RTP Relay

VOIB Slot

VMIB Slot

VMIB Slot

263

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.16.1-1 Zone Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Peer-to-Peer DESCRIPTION If enabled, the VOIP channel is not allocated for IP Phone-to-IP Phone voice. If disabled, the VOIP channel is allocated for IP phone-to-IP phone voice relay. RANGE Disable/Enable DEFAULT Enable

264

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.16.2 Zone RTP Relay Group PGM Code 396

Selecting the Zone RTP Relay Group returns the RTP Relay ON/OFF data input page, Figure 1.5.16.2-1. Enter the desired Zone and RTP Relay Group numbers and click on Load to assign Zone characteristics.

Figure 1.5.16.2-1 Zone RTP Relay Group While it is strongly recommended that a Zone only have a single RTP Relay Group, up to 15 Groups can be assigned to a Zone. Devices in an RTP Relay Group should have common requirements for packet relay use. In some situations, it may be necessary to implement packet relay to groups in a Zone. NOTE When Automatic is assigned as the RTP Relay Rule in Zone Attributes, assignments are ignored. Table 1.5.16.2-1 Zone RTP Relay Group
ATTRIBUTE Force To RTP Relay DESCRIPTION Select RTP Group to force RTP Relay for Zone. RANGE DEFAULT

265

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.16.3 Inter-Zone Attribute PGM Code 397

Selecting the Inter-Zone Attribute returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.16.3-1.Enter the desired Source and Destination Zone number range and click on Load to assign Zone characteristics.

Figure 1.5.16.3-1 Inter-Zone Attribute Inter Zone Attributes define RTP packet relay treatment for communication between devices in different Zones. Table 1.5.16.3-1 Inter-Zone Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Codec Type DESCRIPTION The codec selection method can be defined as device based Station Codec, or based on the codec type assigned to the Inter-Zone. Assigns when to use the packet relay function between Zones, with If Need the MPB will automatically determine when to use packet relay, while Always Not will not use and Forced To DO always implement packet relay. Source VOIB Slot to handle Packet relay for Source Zone Destination VOIB Slot to handle Packet relay for Source Zone. RANGE Station Codec / G.711 G.723 / G.729 DEFAULT Station Codec

RTP Rule

If Need / Always Not / Forced To Do

If Need

Src. RTP Relay VOIB Slot Dest. RTP Relay VOIB Slot

266

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.16.4 Station Zone Attribute PGM Code 399

Selecting the Station Zone Attribute returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.16.4-1. Enter the desired station range and click on Load to assign Station Zone characteristics.

Figure 1.5.16.4-1 Station Zone Attributes Station Zone Attributes define characteristics specific to the Station including Zone assignment. In addition, Zone characteristics set at the Station level take precedence over characteristics for the Zone Attributes. While a Zone may incorporate up to 15 different RTP packet Relay Groups, for clarity a single RTP Relay Group should be used within a Zone. Table 1.5.16.4-1 Station Zone Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Zone No RTP Relay Group Codec Type DESCRIPTION Zone number of station Assigns the RTP Relay group employed by the device. The codec selection method can be defined as device based Zone, or based on the codec type assigned to the Station. 19 N/A, 0115 Follow Zone / G.711 / G.723 / G.729 / G.722 RANGE DEFAULT 1 N/A Follow Zone

267

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.17 SNMP Data

Selecting the SNMP Data returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.17-1.

Figure 1.5.17-1 SNMP Attributes SNMP Attributes, as shown on the screen, are divided into three categories: SNMP Agent, SNMP Security, and SNMP Trap. The SNMP Agent field, SNMP Service enables the SNMP agent running in the iPECS call server. The SNMP port field defines the UDP port used for communications from the iPECS-MG system for SNMP messages (port should not be changed). The SNMP Security pane includes the Read Only and Read Write SNMP Community fields (4 to 16 characters). The SNMP Community designates an SNMP communication group to which an SNMP message belongs, and is a logical relationship between the SNMP agent (iPECS-MG system) and SNMP manager (iPECS NMS). The SNMP community settings must be the same for the iPECS system and the iPECS NMS server. Read Only Community Defines a community string used when the iPECS NMS reads data from the iPECS-MG system (default=Public). Read Write Community Defines the community string used when iPECS NMS reads or writes data to the iPECS-MG system (default=Private). Although the iPECS-MG system can accept packets from any SNMP manger (iPECS NMS), for improved security, the IP address of specific servers can be defined and allowed Read only or Read Write access. It is recommended that the system be assigned with the IP address of a specific NMS server with Read Write access.

268

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

The SNMP Trap configuration defines the Trap Community, and the Trap Destination, which includes the IP Address of the SNMP manager, iPECS NMS, and the message type. The Trap Community designates a communication group to which a Trap message belongs, and is a logical relationship between the SNMP agent (iPECS-MG system) and SNMP manager (iPECS NMS). This 4 to 16 character string should be the same as the Trap community string defined in the iPECS-NMS. The Trap community should be same for all the iPECS-MG systems registered to an iPECS-NMS server whereas the SNMP community may be defined with different strings for each iPECS system. The Trap Destination defines the IP address of the iPECS NMS server and the port, 162. Enter the IP address of the NMS server; however, the port should not be changed. The pull down menu next to the address is used to define the address type: Trap message type is defined in SNMPv1, but because iPECS-NMS and the iPECS-MG system SNMPv2, the Trap type message is not recommended. Notification message type, sent from the SNMP agent once without checking the reception of the message. Inform message type requires a response of receipt from the SNMP manager. If the agent does not receive a response, the message is resent. Inform messages are intended for use in environments with high packet loss; however, use of the Inform message type may detrimentally affect iPECS system performance. Refer to Table 1.5.17-1 for description of the SNMP Attributes and values that can be entered. Table 1.5.17-1 SNMP Attributes
ATTRIBUTE SNMP service SNMP Port Read Only Community DESCRIPTION SNMP Service field is used to set the SNMP agent in the iPECS On or Off. SNMP Protocol port number. Read only community should be used when SNMP manager (NMS) is trying to read data from SNMP agent (MFIM). When the SNMP manager (NMS) needs to both read and write data to the agent (iPECS) this attribute should be enabled. For the SNMP agent (iPECS), this field defines the destination IP address to receive trapped messages (Alarm/fault events). IP address of iPECS NMS server, port 162 should not be changed. Defines how the agent sends the message. 4 ` 16 characters 4 ` 16 characters 4 ` 16 characters IP address Notification Inform Trap Notification RANGE ON/OFF 161 DEFAULT

Read Write Community

Trap Community

Trap Destination Message Type

After finishing all Configuration items, click on the [Save] button.

269

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.18 DECT Data

Selecting the DECT Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.18-1.

Figure 1.5.18-1 DECT Data Main Page

270

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.18.1 DECT Registration

Selecting the Registration returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.18.1-1.

Figure 1.5.18.1-1 DECT Subscription Screen On this page, the DECT ID and authorization codes are defined. In addition, a pull down menu selects one of four subscription events, subscribe, and unsubscribe, mobility or erase registered station. A separate password box permits password entry to terminate (erase) all DECT subscriptions.

271

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.18.1-1 DECT Registration

ATTRIBUTE Park Code REMARK PARK (Portable Access Rights Key) Code: Unique System ID entered at DECT handset subscription to identify the system. To assign a PARK code, enter code and click [Save]. Authentication Code entered at DECT handset to verify subscription. To assign AC Code, enter AC value and click [Save]. Display station range for DECT Enables the system to accept a subscription from a DECT handset, Figure 1.5.18.1 1. Desired station number for the wireless DECT handset Several types of handsets may be selected including type 3 for the GDC-400H. 1. 33X: GDX-33X 2. ST-DECT: Standard DECT 3. 34X/4XX: GDC-34X/4XX Press [Send] after entering the number and type. DECT Unsubscribe Station Number Terminates the subscription for a DECT handset, Figure 1.5.18.1-2 Enter the registered station number and click [Send] button, the subscription is terminated and the wireless DECT handset will no longer be serviced. Authenticate DECT handset, Figure 1.5.18.1-3. Enter the station number and click [Send] button. Authenticate DECT handset,Figure 1.5.18.1-4. Enter the registered station number, select Mobility ON or OFF and click [Send] button. Erase all information related to DECT handset. Enter the station number, and click [Send] button. Terminates the subscription for all DECT handsets, Figure 1.5.18.1-5. Displays all registered DECT handsets, Figure 1.5.18.1-6. Station number Station number Station number 1:33X 2: ST DECT 3:34X/4XX 3 RANGE 14 digits DEFAULT

AC Code

Up to 8 digits

DECT Station Range DECT Subscribe Enable Station Number Phone Type

DECT User Authentication Station Number DECT Mobility Station No STATION Erase Station No DECT Subscribe All Data Erase Password DECT Registered Status

272

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.5.18.1-2 DECT Unsubscribe Pull down

Figure 1.5.18.1-3 DECT User Authentication Pull down

273

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.5.18.1-4 DECT Mobility pull down

Figure 1.5.18.1-5 Station Erase pull down

274

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.5.18.1-6 DECT Registered Station

275

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.18.2 DECT Attributes PGM Code 491

Selecting DECT Attributes returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.18.2-1.

Figure 1.5.18.2-1 DECT Attributes DECT Attributes defines functions associated with DECT equipment and operation as shown in Table 1.5.18.2-1. Table 1.5.18.2-1 DECT ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTE Auto Call Release REMARK If enabled, when the other party of an active internal/ external call disconnects, the GDC-400H returns to idle. If enabled, DECT Base station (GDC-400B/600B) alarms are sent to the Attendant. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Disable 1: Enable DEFAULT OFF

BASE Fault Alarm

Disable

276

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.19 Green Mode

Selecting the Green Mode program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.19-1.

Figure 1.5.19-1 Green Mode Main Page

277

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.19.1 Green Mode Activation

Selecting Green Mode Activation returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.19.1-1.

Figure 1.5.19.1-1 Green Mode Activation The system can disable the power of a Digital Phone or Single Line Telephone (SLT) installed in the DTIB/SLIB/DSIU to save power during night or holiday mode. The power ON/OFF can be controlled by Web admin manually or automatically by assigning power ON/OFF time. Table 1.5.19.1-1 Green Mode Activation Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Power Save Usage Slot No. Board Type Station Range Power Save Mode Current Status Power ON button Power OFF button DESCRIPTION Enables or Disables Power Save usage. The Slot Number of board supporting power control Board Type Station Number Range of board supporting power control Enables or Disables Power Save Usage Mode of each board. Displays the current status of board power ON/OFF. Power ON manually all of stations in Power Save used board. Power OFF manually all of stations in Power Save used board. Disable DEFAULT Disable

278

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.19.2 Green Mode Time Setting

Selecting the Green Mode Time Setting returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.19.2-1.

Figure 1.5.19.2-1 Green Mode Time Setting The power ON/OFF time can be assigned to control Green Mode automatically. The power ON/ OFF time can be defined at each day in a week. And when defined that time, power to assign board will be served or not. Table 1.5.19.2-1 Green Mode Time Setting
ATTRIBUTE Power ON Time Power OFF Time DESCRIPTION The time to start power supply to assigned board. The time to stop power supply to assigned board. DEFAULT

279

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20 Hotel Data

Selecting the Hotel Data program group returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.20-1.

Figure 1.5.20-1 Hotel Data Main Page Most of general information of Hotel feature can be defined.

280

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.1 Hotel General Info PGM Code 500

Selecting the Hotel General Info returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.20.1-1.

Figure 1.5.20.1-1 Hotel General Info Table 1.5.20.1-1 Hotel General Info
ATTRIBUTE Hotel Name Hotel Address Hotel Tel No. Hotel FAX Hotel Homepage PMS Usage DESCRIPTION Hotel Name can be assigned. Hotel Address can be assigned. Hotel Telephone number can be assigned. Hotel FAX number can be assigned. Hotel Homepage address can be assigned. Determines the hotel management system. If this field set to OFF, the system cant support interface for PMS and Fidelio. RANGE Max 24 Characters Max 50 Characters Max 15 Characters Max 15 Characters Max 30 Characters 0: OFF 1: PMS ONLY 2: FIDELIO ONLY 3: PMS + FIDELIO 0: OFF 1: ON OFF DEFAULT

PMS Device 1 (Currently : Disconnected)

Used to set PMS Device 1 (Display the connection status of PMS Device 1. Connected or Disconnected) Used to set PMS Device 2 (Display the connection status of PMS Device 2. Connected or Disconnected) IP address of Fidelio Server Port address of Fidelio Server

OFF

PMS Device 2 (Currently : Disconnected)

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Fidelio Server Address Fidelio Server Port

0.0.0.0 1-65535

281

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.20.1-1 Hotel General Info

ATTRIBUTE Check-In Day COS Check-In Night COS Check-In Timed COS Check-In Digit Conversion Table DESCRIPTION Determines COS in Day mode about check-in room number. modeDetermines COS in Night mode about check-in room number. Determines COS in Timed mode about check-in room number. Determines Conversion Table Index about check-in room number. RANGE 00-15 00-15 00-15 MG100 system: 1-5 MG300 system: 1-9 00-15 00-15 00-15 MG100 system: 1-5 MG300 system: 1-9 DEFAULT 1 1 1 1

Check-Out Day COS Check-Out Night COS Check-Out Timed COS Check-Out Digit Conversion Table

Determines COS in Day mode about check-out room number. Determines COS in Night mode about check-out room number. Determines COS in Timed mode about check-out room number. Determines Digit Conversion Table Index about check-out room number.

1 1 1 1

Check-Out LCD Language Check-Out Prompt Language Guest Info Display

Sets the Language used in the Stations LCD, refer to Table 1.5.20-1 below. Selected language type prompt is played to the user when accessing the VMIB. If enabled, it allows users to view information about guests from font desk while talking with guests over the phone. If enabled, It allows an operator to answer the calls from VIP guests earlier when VIP guests call an attendant. If enabled, it allows an attendant to be informed of VIP guest?s wake-up call and provide wake-up call service. When PGM Code 508 is set up, one digit service is carried out when the timer is expired. 1-3 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0-30

English 1 OFF

VIP Attendant Call Service VIP Wake-up Service

OFF

OFF

Dial One Digit Service Timer

Table 1.5.20.1-2 Language Selection

ENTRY 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 LANGUAGE English Italian Finnish Dutch Swedish Danish Norwegian

282

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.20.1-2 Language Selection

ENTRY 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 LANGUAGE Hebrew German French Portuguese Spanish Korean Estonian Russian Turkish Polish Greek

283

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.2 Hotel Additional Info PGM Code 501

Figure 1.5.20.2-1 Hotel Additional Info Table 1.5.20.2-1 Hotel Additional Info
ATTRIBUTE Call from Office To Guest Room DESCRIPTION This option enables calls to Guest room from Office stations. If this is set to OFF, Office stations are not able to make a call to Guest rooms. This option enables calls to Service station from Office stations. If this is set to OFF, Office stations are not able to make a call to Service stations. This option enables calls to Front-Desk from Office stations. If this is set to OFF, Office stations are not able to make a call to Front-Desks. This option enables calls to Office station from Guest rooms. If this is set to OFF, Guest rooms are not able to make a call to Office stations. This option enables calls to Office station from Service stations. If this is set to OFF, Service stations are not able to make a call to Office stations. This option enables calls to Office station from Front-Desks. If this is set to OFF, Front-Desks are not able to make a call to Office stations. RANGE 0: OFF 1: ON DEFAULT OFF

Call from Office To Service Station

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Call from Office To Front-Desk

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Call from Guest Room To Office

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Call from Service Station To Office

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Call from Front-Desk To Office

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

284

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.20.2-1 Hotel Additional Info

ATTRIBUTE Base Time in Room Rate DESCRIPTION This value is used to decide the staying days when a Guest room is checked out. Example) If Base Time is 10 o?clock, then the total staying days are 3 days in the following case. Check-In time: March 1, 10 AM Check-Out time: March 2, 12 AM That is, check-in before Base time and check-out after Base time is considered as one extra day. If this option is set to OFF, Check-In/Out information is not printed out when a guest is checked in or checked out. This option also controls the print-out of Room charge and Room status which are Front-Desk station menu. If this is set to ON, a room charge data is displayed in Echo mode when a front-desk makes it printed out in simple mode. If this option is set to ON, calls transferred to a guest room from a service station are charged to the guest room. You can program a string for Method of Payment which is printed when guests are checked out. Total 10 different strings can be programmed. RANGE 00-23 (o?clock) DEFAULT 00

Check-In/Out On-line Print

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Echo Mode

0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON Max 7 characters

OFF

Toll Charge To Room

OFF

Method Of Payment (BIN NO 0~9)

Empty

285

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.3 Hotel Station Attribute PGM Code 502

Figure 1.5.20.3-1 Hotel Station Attribute Table 1.5.20.3-1 Hotel Station Attribute
ATTRIBUTE Hotel Service Type DESCRIPTION Select the hotel station type of a DN for your purpose. If this hotel station type is changed, the name of DN will be set to the default. This field only shows the current check-in status of a Guest room. This is not allowed to be changed in this PGM menu. If this field is ON, guest rooms can make an internal call to other rooms. If this field is OFF, only guest rooms with the same PMS group ID can call each other. If a guest room is VIP, it is able to use privileged VIP feature. You can configure the maid status of a guest room to one of the followings. 1: TO BE CLEANED 2: UNDER CLEANING 3: READY FOR SALE 4: OUT OF SERVICE 5: UNDER REPAIR 6: REPAIR COMPLETE 7: ROOM OCCUPIED If this field is set to ON, a guest room is not allowed to make an outgoing call. RANGE 0: OFFICE 1: GUEST 2: SVC STA 3: FRONT Read Only DEFAULT OFFICE

Check-In Status

Intercom Enable

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

Guest Type Room Status

0: NON VIP 1: VIP 1-7

NON VIP TO BE CLEANED

Cut-Off

0: OFF 1: ON

OFF

286

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.20.3-1 Hotel Station Attribute

ATTRIBUTE PMS Group ID DESCRIPTION Even though Intercom call is disabled, guest rooms can call each other if they have the same PMS group ID. This filed means the check-out schedule of a guest room. With this option, Bath Alarm function is enabled. If this option is set to ON for a guest room, the room can be monitored by another station when it is checked-in. Room class can be assigned to each room. Room class is used to calculate room charge based on the rate of room class. This Room Class index is linked with Rate for Room Class Admin PGM 503. Call charge rate bin number can be assigned to each room. This Call Charge Rate index is linked with Rate for Call Charge Rate Admin PGM 504. 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 1-20 OFF OFF RANGE 0-10000 DEFAULT 0

Check-Out Date/Time Bath Alarm Room Monitor

Room Class

Call Charge Rate

1-6

Not assigned

287

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.4 Rate For Room Class PGM Code 503

Figure 1.5.20.4-1 Rate For Room Class This feature allows the operator to assign room type name, room cost and part time fees. This information is used to calculate room charge when a guest checks out. Table 1.5.20.4-1 Rate For Room Class Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Room type Name Room Cost Part Time Bin No Title for room class Cost for room class Fee for part time table no DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Max 5 Characters 0-9999999

288

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.5 Call Charge Rate PGM Code 504

Selecting the Call Charge Rate returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.20.5-1.

Figure 1.5.20.5-1 Call Charge Rate Table 1.5.20.5-1 Call Charge Rate
ATTRIBUTE Rate Name DESCRIPTION Percent of Call Change Name of Call Charge rate RANGE 0-999 Max 6 Characters DEFAULT

289

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.6 Bar/MiniBar List PGM Code 505

Selecting Bar/MiniBar List will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.20.6-1.

Figure 1.5.20.6-1 Bar/MiniBar List iPECS-MG system supports 100 bar/mini-bar items. Table 1.5.20.6-1 Bar/MiniBar List Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Bar Item Name Cost Tax rate Bin No DESCRIPTION Name of Mini Bar item Cost of Mini Bar Item Tax rate index of Mini Bar item This Call Tax Rate index is linked with Tax Rate for bill Admin PGM 505 0 1 DEFAULT

290

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.7 Tax Rate For Bill PGM Code 506

Selecting the Tax Rate For Bill returns the sub-menu displayed in Figure 1.5.20.7-1.

Figure 1.5.20.7-1 Tax Rate For Bill Table 1.5.20.7-1 Tax Rate For Bill
ATTRIBUTE Rate DESCRIPTION Percent of Tax RANGE 0.0-99.99 DEFAULT 0.0

291

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.8 Fee For Part Time PGM Code 507

Selecting Fee For Part Time will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.20.8-1.

Figure 1.5.20.8-1 Fee For Part Time In case the day of check-in is the same as the day of check-out, a part time fee may be assessed according to the room type of checked in room or hotel policy. Each room type may have up to 6 fields for different part-time ranges and fees. There are 32 fields available to program part time range and fee in entire hotel system. Table 1.5.20.8-1 Fee For Part Time Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Part Time Range Rate (%) Remark DESCRIPTION The Time range when will be applied part time Rate for original room charge Title for part time rate 0-24 0-100 DEFAULT

292

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.9 Dial One digit Service PGM Code 508

Selecting the Dial One Digit Service returns the page shown, Figure 1.5.20.9-1.

Figure 1.5.20.9-1 Dial One Digit Service When a guest dials only one digit (0~9,*, #) and waits for a certain period of time, a call is made to a specific extension (front desk, service station), enabling a guest to call a front desk or a service station easily. If there are one-digit numbering plan codes, one digit service is not available for those digits. That is, if the CO Group Access Code value is set to 9 in CO Group Access Code (PGM 114), then One Digit Service for digit 9 is not available. Or, if the Attendant Call feature code is set to 0 in Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113), then One Digit Service for digit 0 is not available. In addition, this feature is not available for office extension. Table 1.5.20.9-1 Hotel General Info
ATTRIBUTE Digit 1 DESCRIPTION Determines the destination number for digit 1. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit 2. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit 3. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. RANGE Max 8 digits DEFAULT

Digit 2

Max 8 digits

Digit 3

Max 8 digits

293

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.20.9-1 Hotel General Info

ATTRIBUTE Digit 4 DESCRIPTION Determines the destination number for digit 4. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit 5. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit 6. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit 7. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit 8. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit 9. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit 0. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit *. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. Determines the destination number for digit #. Feature code / Group no./ STA no(Front Desk, Service Station, etc) can be assigned to destination. RANGE Max 8 digits DEFAULT

Digit 5

Max 8 digits

Digit 6

Max 8 digits

Digit 7

Max 8 digits

Digit 8

Max 8 digits

Digit 9

Max 8 digits

Digit 0

Max 8 digits

Digit *

Max 8 digits

Digit #

Max 8 digits

294

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.10 Check In/Out

Selecting Check In/Out will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.20.10-1.

Figure 1.5.20.10-1 Check In/Out Check-In/Modify status of room: This feature allows operator to check in and modify status of room. Click [CI] or [Mo] button, then new input entry page will be displayed, Figure 1.5.20.10-2 or Figure 1.5.20.10-3.

295

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.5.20.10-2 Check In

Figure 1.5.20.10-3 Modify

296

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.20.10-1 Check In/Modify

ATTRIBUTE Guest Name (Station Name) Guest Type Room Status DESCRIPTION Guest Name, The name is displayed on the LCD of Digital Phone. Specify guest type (VIP or non-VIP) This is only available in Modify mode. Update maid status for guest room checked in. REMARK Max 16 characters NON VIP / VIP TO BE CLEANED/ UNDER CLEANING/ READY FOR SALE/ OUT OF SERVICE/ UNDER REPAIR/ REPAIR COMPLETE/ ROOM OCCUPIED 0 ~ 15

COS Day/Night/Timed

Specify Guests COS (Class-of-Service). Which determines the ability of the user to dial certain types of calls, refer to Table 2.3.3.6-1,2. Separate COS assignments are made for Day, Night and Times Mode system operation. Maximum level of COS privileges is 16 (0~15). These privileges are represented in Toll Exception Table (PGM 250). This COS interacts with the CO Line COS to establish overall dialing or Toll restrictions. The Digit Conversion Table index is assigned to the Guest Station. Sets the Language used in the Guest Stations LCD

Digit Conversion Table LCD Language Display Mode

MG100 system: 1-5 MG300 system: 1-9 English/ Italian/ Finnish/ Dutch/ Swedish/ Danish/ Norwegian/ Hebrew/ German/ French/ Portuguese/ Spanish/ Korean/ Estonian/ Russian/ Turkish/ Polish/ Greek 1, 2, 3

Voice Prompt Type

Selected language type prompt is played to the guest when accessing the VMIB. It is same as Prompt Language Index in PGM 145. It defines that the guest is included in a particular PMG group. Ser wake-up time System is able to enable/disable call between different PMS groups. If this field is ON, guest rooms can make an internal call to other rooms. If this field is OFF, only guest rooms with the same PMS group ID can call each other.

PMS Group ID Wake-Up (HHMM) Intercom Enable

0 ~ 10000 HHMM, repeat OFF/ON

297

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.20.10-1 Check In/Modify

ATTRIBUTE Cut-Off Authorization Code (Password) Check-Out Date/Time Bath Alarm Prepaid Money Room Monitor Call Charge Rate DESCRIPTION The use of CO lines from guest stations can be allowed or denied by this. Define the guests password. It is same as Password in PGM 131. Specify when the guest will check out. Enable/disable bath alarm feature Register/change Prepaid money Enable/disable room monitor (baby listening) Define call charge rate This Call Charge Rate index is linked with Rate for Call Charge Rate Admin PGM 504. Define room class This Room Class index is linked with Rate for Room Class Admin PGM 503. REMARK OFF/ON Max 12 Digits (0~9) mm/dd/yyyy hour (0~23) OFF/ON 0 ~ 999999 OFF/ON 1~6

Room Class

1 ~ 20

298

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Check-Out: This feature allows operator to check out of rooms. Click CO button, then new page will be displayed, Figure 1.5.20.10-4. Ay this web page, if receipt is needed, then clicks the Receipt button. New page will be popped-up Figure 1.5.20.10-5.

Figure 1.5.20.10-4 Check Out

Figure 1.5.20.10-5 Receipt

299

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.11 Display Room Charge

Selecting Display Room Charge will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.20.11-1.

Figure 1.5.20.11-1 Display Room Charge This feature is used to display each room total charge. Fill the Room No field and press View button, then total charge of room will be displayed. Table 1.5.20.11-1 Display Room Charge Attributes
ATTRIBUTE Room DESCRIPTION Type room number to see detail room charge. There are 3 methods to see room charge. 1. Input single room number (ex: 100) 2. Input multiple room number (ex: 100, 101, 105) 3. Input room range (ex: 100-110) DEFAULT

300

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.20.12 Bar Cost Charge

Selecting Bar Cost Charge will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.20.12-1.

Figure 1.5.20.12-1 Bar Cost Charge Mini-bar charge of each room can be registered from this menu. It can be displayed or printed upon hotel charge display and check-out. Table 1.5.20.12-1 Bar Cost Charge
ATTRIBUTE Charged Room No Bar Code Bar Cost DESCRIPTION Guest station room number Bar Code Index among MiniBar List Table (mini) Bar Cost 1 ~ 100 -999999 ~ 999999 DEFAULT

301

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.21 Initialization
Selecting Initialization will return the sub-menu in Figure 1.5.21-1.

Figure 1.5.21-1 Initialization

302

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.5.21.1 Initialization PGM Code 499

Selecting Initialization will display the page shown, Figure 1.5.21.1-1.

Figure 1.5.21.1-1 Initialization The system has been pre-programmed with certain features using the default data. The default data are loaded into memory when the system is initialized. The system should always be initialized when first installed or the database will appear corrupted. The system can be initialized manually during installation, refer to the iPECSMG Description & Installation Manual, Section 4.2.1.2. After Initialization, the system should be reset.

303

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.5.21.1-1 INITIALIZATION

DISPLAY All Database Station Data Station Button Data CO Line Data Station Group Data System Data SMDR Data System Timer Table Data Tenant Data Networking Data SIP Data Hot Desk Logout Hotel Data Reset System REMARK Initialize all databases. Initialize station-based data (except flexible button data). Initialize flexible button data. Initialize CO line-based data. Initialize Station Group-based data. Initialize System-based data. Initialize SMDR data. Initialize System Timers. Initialize Table-based data. Initialize Tenant Group-based data. Initialize Networking data. Initialize SIP data. Force to Log-out Hot Desk Agent. Initialize Hotel data Restart the system Desired station range Desired station range (init whole data when no range) Desired station range (init whole data when no range) Desired CO line range (init whole data when no range) RANGE

304

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6 File Upload & Upgrade

The iPECS-MG systems employ a NAND based memory file system; HTML, MPB upgrade and iPECS-MG appliance image files can be uploaded. Selecting S/W Upgrade from the main Web screen returns the page shown and sub-menus as shown, Figure 1.6-1.

Figure 1.6-1 File Upload & Upgrade In addition to the appliance image, prompts, system greetings and BASE upgrade image can be uploaded. Prompt upgrade supports both VMIB and AAFU. System greetings are only supported in AAFU format, both upload and download can be done. BASE upgrade support upgrading BASE connected to WTIB.

305

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.1 File Upload

From the File Upload page (Figure 1.6.1-1 File Upload), select files to upload to system memory and click the [Upload] button. File Upload menu is not only employed for MPB upgrade, but also for G/W upgrade and VMIB prompt upgrade. MPB upgrade is completed just as uploading MPB S/W file. MPB S/W file is sent to the system memory, saved and automatically loaded upon a system reset or restart. HTML image files included MPB S/W file are extracted and previous HTML files are deleted on completion of the upload process. G/W and Prompt upgrade need more steps after uploading G/W upgrade file and Prompt file. (refer to 1.6.2 G/W Upgradeand 1.6.4 VMIB Prompt Upgrade).

Figure 1.6.1-1 File Upload NOTE If file upload succeeds, a success Confirmation page will be displayed.

306

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.2 G/W Upgrade

If the iPECS-MG Appliance image file is uploaded (including already-uploaded files), all uploaded appliance image files will be listed along with the type, as shown, Figure 1.6.2-1 G/ W Upgrade. 1. If the desired appliance image file is not uploaded, upload the appliance file using the File Upload menu. 2. Click [Select]; the corresponding appliances are displayed. 3. Select the appliances to upgrade. 4. Click [Upgrade]; the upgrade process will start and a progress screen will be displayed. NOTE If the Appliance is already in the process of an upgrade, Figure 1.6.2-2 Upgrade Process Working is displayed to indicate the upgrade in process.

Figure 1.6.2-1 G/W Upgrade

307

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.6.2-2 Upgrade Process Working

308

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.3 Upgrade Process View

The Upgrade Process View provides a status window (Figure 1.6.3-1 Upgrade Process View); not only for appliance board and terminal upgrade activity in process but also VMIB prompt upgrade.

Figure 1.6.3-1 Upgrade Process View

309

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.4 VMIB Prompt Upgrade

AAFU and VMIBs inserted in the iPECS-MG system have their own prompt. As in G/W Upgrade, prompt files should be uploaded in the systems memory first, then perform the following: 1. After uploading the desired prompt files at the File Upload menu, move to this VMIB Prompt Upgrade menu. 2. Select the prompt file to upgrade and Click [Select] button. 3. Select the desired VMIB slot and prompt index. 4. Click [Upgrade] button, as shown in Figure 1.6.4-1 VMIB Prompt Upgrade and then the upgrade process will start and a progress screen will be displayed as in G/W upgrade.

Figure 1.6.4-1 VMIB Prompt Upgrade

310

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.5 AAFU System Greeting Up & Download View

The following screens display Upload and Download of AAFU System Greetings.

Figure 1.6.5-1 AAFU System Greeting Individual Upload View

Figure 1.6.5-2 AAFU System Greeting Individual Download View

311

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Figure 1.6.5-3 AAFU System Greeting Download View

Figure 1.6.5-4 AAFU System Greeting Upload View

312

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.6 WTIB Base Upgrade

WTIBs have two kinds of appliance image files: One for the WTIB itself, and the other for Bases which are connected to WTIB. The WTIB upgrade process is the same as the G/W Upgrade process. In addition to the WTIB (or G/W) Upgrade process, Base upgrade needs one more step to burn the Base image file to the Base. This Base Upgrade menu can be used to burn the Base image file. 1. After uploading the BASE image file in File Upload menu, and after upgrading the BASE image file to WTIB in G/W Upgrade menu, move to this BASE Upgrade menu. 2. Select the desired WTIB slot number to burn BASE image. 3. Click [Upgrade] (shown Figure 1.6.6-1 WTIB Base upgrade). NOTE In BASE upgrading, the upgrade process view is not provided, because BASE image burning time is long and the number of BASE is variable. But, this page will be renewed automatically every 10 seconds for notifying upgrade status of BASE after clicking [Upgrade] button.

Figure 1.6.6-1 WTIB Base Upgrade

313

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.7 iPECS-MG System Upgrade Process

1.6.7.1 iPECS-MG Software Full Upgrade Sequence
The following shows the order in which the upgrade process proceeds with application software and firmware files for iPECS-MG MPB and other boards.. NOTE The xxxx in the ROM file names indicates the version number of the file. To upgrade the MPB: 1. Upload MPB application image. Ex.,
IPECS-MG 100 GS55Mxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version) iPECS-MG 300 GS56Mxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version)

2. Restart MPB. To upgrade the Appliances: 1. Upload Appliance application image to MPB. Ex.,
BRIB application image: GS55Nxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version) PRIB/R2 application image: GS55Qxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version) SLIB12/32 application image: GS55Sxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version) VMIB/AAIB application image: GS55Vxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version) VOIB application image: GS55Txxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version) WTIB application image: GS55Uxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version)

2. Select the G/W Upgrade page. 3. Select appliances application image. 4. Select target appliances & Upgrade application image. 5. Wait until upgrade process completes. 6. Automatically restart when upgrade completes successfully.

314

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

To upgrade Voice Prompts in the VMIB/AAFU: 1. Upload voice prompt image to MPB. Ex.,
Voice prompt file??96Wxxxx.rom (?? Is nation, i.e. GS, DM, KR, etc. ; xxxx indicates the version)

2. Select the VMIB Prompt Upgrade page. 3. Select the desired voice prompt image. 4. Select the target VMIB and first/second/third prompt index for multiple language voice prompt & upgrade voice prompt image. 5. Upgrade confirmation will display. To upload/download System Greetings to/from AAFU: 1. Select AAFU SG Up&Download 2. Select the Upload/Download Type (Individual upload, SysGreeting download, Individual download, SysGreeting upload). 3. Upload or download the desired system-greeting file. Ex.,
System Greeting individual file: x_y.wav (x indicates system greeting type; y indicates system greeting index) System Greeting rom file: SYTYPEx.rom (x indicates system greeting type)

To upgrade the WTIB Base: 1. Upload Base image to MPB. Ex.,

Base image: GS55Jxxxx.rom (xxxx indicates the version)

2. Select G/W Upgrade page. 3. Select BASE image. 4. Select target WTIB & Upgrade. 5. Upgrade confirmation will display. 6. Select BASE Upgrade page. 7. Select the target WTIB & Upgrade. 8. Upgrade confirmation will result in refreshing the current page.

315

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.7.2 MPB Upgrade

First, confirm the most recently upgraded version of the MPB, then upload the desired ROM files and reset the system. If the new system database is not compatible with the existing system database, it will be necessary to initialize the system database manually using the Dip-switch on the MPB (Section 1), or use the Initialization process found in Section 1.3 of the iPECS-MG Administration & Maintenance Manual. Upgrading the MPB includes HTML files (a separate upload of the HTML files is not required).

1.6.7.3 Upgrade HTML Files

In the File Upload Menu, upload the systems HTML files and reloads the page. HTML file upload generally takes about 5 - 10 minutes. Most of the HTML files are included in MPB, so, individual HTML upload is not needed.

1.6.7.4 Appliances Upgrade (Gateway Board and IP Phone)

To upgrade appliances: 1. Upload appliance image, and click on G/W Upgrade. 2. Select appliance image. 3. If appliance image is selected, click [Select]. 4. Select appliances. 5. If appliances are selected, click [Upgrade]; the page shown in Figure 1.6.3-1 will be displayed indicating the Upload command has been sent and the upgrade process is in progress. 6. When the appliance upgrade process is successful, the status will display Success. 7. If the upgrade process fails, the process is attempted an additional three (3) times will be attempted three (3) more times before being adandoned.

316

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.6.7.5 Voice Prompt Upgrade

To upgrade Voice Prompts: 1. Upload the voice prompt image, and click [VMIB Prompt Upgrade]. 2. Select the desired voice prompt image. 3. If voice prompt image is selected, click [Select]. 4. Select AAFU/VMIBs 5. If AAFU/VMIB is selected, click [Upgrade]; the page shown in Figure 1.6.3-1 will be displayed indicating the Upload command has been sent and upgrade process is progress. 6. When the voice prompt upgrade process is successful, the status will display Success. 7. If the upgrade process fails, the process wil be attempted three (3) more times before being abandoned.

1.6.7.6 WTIB Base Upgrade

To upgrade the WTIB BASE: 1. Upload Base image, and click [G/W Upgrade]. 2. Select BASE image. 3. If Base image is selected, click [Select]. 4. Select WTIBs. 5. If WTIBs is selected, click [Upgrade]; the page shown in Figure 1.6.3-1 will be displayed indicating the Upload command has been sent and upgrade process is progress. 6. When the appliance upgrade process is successful, the status will display Success. 7. If the upgrade process fails, the process will be attempted three (3) more times before being abandoned. 8. After successful upgrade, click [Base Upgrade] to select WTIBs. 9. If WTIBs are selected, click [Upgrade]. 10.The upgrade will be confirmed when page is automatically refreshed.

317

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.7 System Management

The System Management tab from the main screen permits download of all or portions of the system database, and downloading and viewing of SMDR data, Figure 1.7-1.

Figure 1.7-1 System Management

318

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.7.1 Database
Selecting the Database menu item will display the Database sub-menu items, Figure 1.7.1-1.

Figure 1.7.1-1 Download & Upload sub-menu

319

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.7.1.1 Database Download

Selecting Database Download will display the page shown, Figure 1.7.1.1-1. Selecting this option will download the entire iPECS-MG system database to the local PC, and also allows the database in the PC to be uploaded to an iPECS-MG system using the File Upload procedure (Section 1.7.1.2).

Figure 1.7.1.1-1 Database Download To download the database: 1. Click on the [Click here] button ; the File Download window will display. 2. Save files to disk. NOTE The following screen will appear for all download processes.

Figure 1.7.1.1-2 Database File Save dialog

320

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.7.1.2 Database Upload

The Database Upload selection will display the page shown, Figure 1.7.1.2-1. By selecting the database file from the local PC, the desired database can be uploaded to the iPECS system database.

Figure 1.7.1.2-1 Database Upload

321

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.7.2 SMDR
The iPECS system can download SMDR data in a SYLK format file (.slk). This file can be opened using any common spreadsheet application. The system will provide three types of view of SMDR data - Station range date, Non Station date and All SMDR date. (Figure 1.7.2-1). This page may also be used to delete SMDR records.

Figure 1.7.2-1 SMDR Access

322

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8 Station Program (User Portal)

In Figure 1.2.3-1 Station Password Station Password page, enter a station number and password, then click' the [Login] button to access the Station Program Main Page, refer to Figure 1.8-1.

Figure 1.8-1 Station Program Main Page In the Station Program User Portal, users can modify various station attributes, set-up call forwarding, assign flexible buttons, program Station Speed dial numbers and send SMS. The following sections provide details on each of the available Station Program User portal Web pages. The Station Program User portal main page has three sections, Station selected Upper frame Web site directory & navigation section Left frame Info and Entry section Central frame

323

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.1 Station Port Attributes

Selecting Station Port Attributes will display the input entry page, Figure 1.8.1-1.

Figure 1.8.1-1 Station Port Attributes Station Port Attributes define the specific features and functions available to the installed terminal.

324

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.8.1-1 Station Port Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Headset Mode DESCRIPTION Determines if Speakerphone mode, Headset mode or Ear Mic Mode will be used. In Headset mode, this item selects device to receive incoming ring signals. RANGE 0: Speaker 1: Headset 2: E-MIC 0: Speaker 1: Headset 2: Both 3: E-MIC 0: OFF 1: ON English Italian Finnish Dutch Swedish Danish Norwegian Hebrew German French Portuguese Spanish Korean Estonian Russian 1: DDMMYY 0: MMDDYY 1: 12 Hour Mode 0: 24 Hour Mode 0: Always Off 1: Busy Only 2: Always On 3: Auto (PGM 2817) 4: Delayed Off 0: Times New Roman 1: Gothic 0015 1: Handfree 2: Tone 3: Privacy 0: N/A 1: Ring LED 2: MW Remind Tone 3: Ring LED + Tone DEFAULT Speaker

Headset Ring

Speaker

Use Bluetooth

If Bluetooth is supported at the station, you can determine whether stations Bluetooth is used or not. Sets the Language used in the Stations LCD.

OFF

LCD language Display Mode

English

LCD Date Display Mode LCD Time Display Mode Backlight Usage

Sets the Station Date display as month/ day or day/month. Sets the Time display mode as 12 hour or 24-hour (military) time. If a station can support LCD backlight, you can set backlight usage option.

DDMMYY 12 Hour Busy Only

LIP-8000Phone Font

Determines if Times New Roman or Gothic font is used. LIP 8000 Series terminal can adjust LCD brightness. Selects Handsfree, Privacy or Tone ring ICM Signaling mode. Determines the way to notify a station of wait message.

Gothic

LIP-8000 Phone LCD Brightness Intercom Answer Mode

07 Tone

Message-Wait Indication

MW REMIND TONE

325

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.8.1-1 Station Port Attributes

ATTRIBUTE BGM DESCRIPTION Enables background music. The BGM is played while the phone is idle. RANGE No BGM Internal Music External Music VMIB MOH1 VMIB MOH2 VMIB MOH3 VMIB MOH4 (MG-300 Only) SLT MOH1 SLT MOH2 SLT MOH3 SLT MOH4 SLT MOH5 DEFAULT No BGM

326

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.2 Station DN Attributes

Selecting Station DN Attributes will display the input entry page, Figure 1.8.2-1.

Figure 1.8.2-1 Station DN Attributes Station Directory Number Attributes define features and functions available to the station directory number.

327

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.8.2-1 Station Directory Number Attributes

ATTRIBUTE Station Name Password DESCRIPTION Enables user name entry. The name is displayed on the LCD of Digital Phones. Password is employed to control access to the system resources and facilities. Walking COS, CO/IP Group access DISA callers and certain Call Forward types may require the input of a valid password. Activate or deactivate DND. Assign Wakeup Time. If attendant, assign other stations wakeup time. Displays the number of urgent messages. Displays the number of new messages. Displays the number of saved messages. SMTP Mail Server Address User Mail Address that will receive the e-mail SMTP Mail Server ID SMTP Mail Server Password Sender Mail Address that will be put in the senders address field in the e-mail. 0~250 0~250 0~250 IP address IP address Max. 20 Max. 20 Max. 48 RANGE Max. 16 Chars 012 digits DEFAULT -

DND Wakeup Time Attendant Wakeup Time VMIB Urgent Message No VMIB New Message No VMIB Saved Message No VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server Address VM MSG-User Mail Address VM MSG SMTP Mail Server ID VM MSG SMTP Mail Server Password VM MSG - SMTP Mail Sender Address

OFF/ON

OFF 0 0 0 -

328

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.3 Call Forward

Selecting Call Forward will display the input entry page, Figure 1.8.3-1.

Figure 1.8.3-1 Call Forward

329

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.3.1 Station Call Forward

Stations can be programmed so that incoming CO and Intercom calls are forwarded to a station, station group or external number. Table 1.8.3.1-1 Station Call Forward
ATTRIBUTE Forward Type DESCRIPTION Specify call forward type. RANGE 0: Not Assigned 1: Unconditional / 2: Busy 3: No Answer / 4: Busy or No Answer Max. 32 digits 0: All / 1: Day 2: Night / 3: Timed (0600) sec DEFAULT Not Assigned

Forward Number Forward Apply Time CFW No-Answer Timer Forward Information Display

Specify Call Forward Destination by entering dial digits. Specify Call Forward Applying Time. Call is forwarded to Call Forward Destination, if station does not respond during this CFW NO ANS TMR timer. Enables Forward Display Option to check forward information in idle state.

ALL 15sec

0: OFF 1: ON

ON

330

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.3.2 Preset Call Forward

Selecting Preset Call Forward will display the input entry page, Figure 1.8.3.2-1.

Figure 1.8.3.2-1 Preset Call Forward Stations can be programmed so that incoming CO and Intercom calls are forwarded to a preset station or station group. This allows an external call or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a pre-determined destination. Preset Forward can be separately assigned Internal Unconditional, Internal Busy, Internal No Answer, External Unconditional, External Busy or External No Answer preset forwarding to any station, station group or external number. Table 1.8.3.2-1 Preset Call Forward
ATTRIBUTE Internal Unconditional Internal Busy Internal No-Answer External Unconditional External Busy External No-Answer DESCRIPTION The unconditional preset forward destination of internal (intercom) call. The busy preset forward destination of internal (intercom) call. The no-answer preset forward destination of internal (intercom) call. The unconditional preset forward destination of external call. The busy preset forward destination of external call. The no-answer preset forward destination of external call. RANGE Max 32 digits Max 32 digits Max 32 digits Max 32 digits Max 32 digits Max 32 digits DEFAULT

331

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.4 Pre-selected Message

Selecting Pre-selected Message will display the input entry page, Figure 1.8.4-1.

Figure 1.8.4-1 Pre-selected Message A user can select a message to be displayed on the LCD of a calling Digital Phone. There are ten pre-defined messages (index 1-0), several allow for auxiliary information such as a time, date or number. A user may activate Custom Display Messaging to send a custom text message to the LCD of a calling Phone.

332

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.5 Station Speed Dial

Selecting Station Speed Dial will display the input entry page, Figure 1.8.5-1.

Figure 1.8.5-1 Station Speed Dial Each station can store commonly dialed numbers for easy access using Station Speed Dial bins. Each station has access to 50 Speed Dial numbers. Each Speed Dial number can be up to 32 characters in length and may include special instruction codes for analog and ISDN lines. Additionally speed dial name can be entered and Differential Ring type that is used when incoming call`s CLI matches this speed dial digits can be assigned here.

333

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.6 Flex Buttons

Selecting Station Flex Buttons will display the input entry page, Figure 1.8.6-1.

Figure 1.8.6-1 Flex Buttons Each Flex button for each Phone/DSS Console can be assigned a function (TYPE) from the pull down menu as shown Table 1.8.6-1. After selecting the Type for a button, enter the value, if required.

334

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.8.6-1 Flex Button Type & Value

ATTRIBUTE Type DESCRIPTION Select button type from available choices: Not Assigned Station DSS: assign station DSS button CO Number: assign CO line button Loop key: assign Loop Key CO Group Access: assign CO Group Access Code Station Group Number: assign station Group Number ACD Group Number: assign ACD Group Number Dial Number: assign feature code or digits Directory Number: assign Directory Number REDIAL: assign [REDIAL] button SPEED: assign [SPEED] button CONFERENCE: assign [REDIAL] button MUTE: assign [MUTE] button CALL BACK: assign [CALL BK] button DND/FWD: assign [DND/FORWARD] button TRANSFER: assign [TRANSFER] button FLASH: assign [FLASH] button PTT: assign [PTT] button Station Number if button is Directory Number type. Dial digit in other cases. The Ring Option of Directory Number (Station Number) Determines Directory Number (Station Number) access type if button is Directory Number type. 0. All call: there is no restriction. 1. Dial After Seizure: Unable to seize only by off-hook when making outgoing calls even if the button is set to prime number button. 2. Incoming only: Unable to make an outgoing call using this button and only answering incoming call is allowed. Or, Button Assignment privilege at the station if button is Dial Number type. Button Name RANGE DEFAULT

Value Ring Option Access type

Name

335

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.7 Station ICLID

Selecting Station ICLID will display the input entry page, Figure 1.8.7-1.

Figure 1.8.7-1 Station ICLID Each station can assign specific CLI to route other destination.

336

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.8 Mobile Extension Attribute

Selecting Mobile Extension Attributes displays the input entry page, Figure 1.8.8-1.

Figure 1.8.8-1 Mobile Extension Attributes A mobile phone can be used in conjunction with a station. The Mobile phone can access system resources available to the users wired phone and will receive ringing for incoming calls. The user may be allowed to enable the Mobile extension and define the mobile number. Table 1.8.8-1 Mobile Phone Attributes
ATTRIBUTE EXT.ID Mobile enable Number CLI Mobile Service Mode DESCRIPTION Mobile phone index Enable mobile extension ability. Mobile extension number Mobile extension CLI number Select mobile service mode. 0: OFF 1: ON Max. 24 digits Max. 24 digits 0 (All Call): Apply mobile service to all calls 1 (Service CLI only): Apply mobile service to the calls of which the CLI matches to one of the CLI's in CLI1~CLI5. OFF All Call RANGE DEFAULT

Mobile Service CLI (15)

CLI for Mobile Service

337

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.9 Internal SMS

Selecting Send Internal SMS displays the input entry page, Figure 1.8.9-1.

Figure 1.8.9-1 Internal SMS

338

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.10 ACD Group Management

Only ACD supervisor can access this page. If a station is ACD supervisor then selecting ACD Group Management displays the input entry page, Figure 1.8.10-1.

Figure 1.8.10-1 ACD Group Management Table 1.8.10-1 ACD Group Management
ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Group Forward Destination DESCRIPTION When ACD Group status is Group Forward Status, all the ACD call will be forwarded to the assigned destination. RANGE N/A Station Number Station Group ACD Group Digits 0: Release Call Night 1: Announcement Service 2: Forward Destination N/A Station Number Station Group ACD Group Digits 0: Release Call Night 1: Announcement Service 2: Forward Destination DEFAULT N/A

Night Service

This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Night Status.

Release Call

Night Forward Destination

Specify the Night Service Forward Destination of an ACD group If Night Service type is Forward, calls will be diverted to forward destination in Night Service mode. This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Hiliday Status.

N/A

Holiday Service

Release Call

339

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

Table 1.8.10-1 ACD Group Management

ATTRIBUTE/ DISPLAY Holiday Forward Destination DESCRIPTION Specify the Holiday Service Forward Destination of an ACD group If Holiday Service type is Forward, calls will be diverted to forward destination in Holiday Service mode. This entry defines how to remote ACD call when group status is Overflow Status. RANGE N/A Station Number Station Group ACD Group Digits 0: Release Call Night 1: Announcement Service 2: Forward Destination N/A Station Number Station Group ACD Group Digits 0 99 DEFAULT N/A

Overflow Service

Release Call

Overflow Forward Destination

Specify the Overflow Service Forward Destination of an ACD group If Overflow Service type is Forward, calls will be diverted to forward destination in Overflow Service mode. This entry defines MAX queuing call count. If the queued ACD Call count is greater than the max q-count, ACD group state will be changed to Overflow Status. This entry defines reroute usage after queuing time over. Reroute destination after queuing time expiration.

N/A

MAX Queuing Count

10

Froward Service After Queuing Forward Destination After Queuing

0: Release Call 1: Forward Destination N/A Station Number Station Group ACD Group Digits 0: Not use 1: Forward Call to No-Answer Forward Destination 2: Agent DND state Change 3: Agent DND State Change & Forward Call. 0: N/A 1: Station Number 2: Station Group 3: ACD Group 4: Digits

Release Call N/A

Agent No-Answer Service

This entry defines no-answer Agent case about ACD-call, 1) Not use. 2) Forward Call to No-Answer Forward Destination: call will be forwarded to defined destination. 3) Agent DND State Change: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state. 4) Agent DND State Change & Forward Call: Agent state will be scanged to DND state, and ACD call will be forwarded to defined destination. When Agent No-Answer option is Forward, applied destination can be assigned.

Not use

Agent No-Answer Froward Destination

N/A

340

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.11 ACD Group Call Traffic

Only ACD supervisor can access this page. If a station is ACD supervisor then Selecting ACD Group Call Traffic displays the page shown, Figure 1.8.11-1. For detailed explanation, refer to iPECS-MG Feature and Operation manual Section 10. 10 ACD Group Call Traffic.

Figure 1.8.11-1 ACD Group Call Traffic

341

iPECS-MG Web Administration Manual

Issue 2.0

1.8.12 Station Logout

Selecting Logout will terminate the Station Program session and return the Station Program entry page shown in Section 1.2.3.

Figure 1.8.12-1 Station Logout

342